| 	
		 This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					P910i   
					User Guide   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Contents   
					Entering text..................................................................... 32   
					
					OVERVIEW   
					Introduction................................................................. 9   
					Phone.......................................................................... 45   
					Call handling with the flip closed.................................... 45   
					Call handling with the flip open ...................................... 48   
					Handling two or more calls.............................................. 50   
					Call list and call log ......................................................... 52   
					Hints and smart functions ................................................ 52   
					Preferences....................................................................... 58   
					Getting to know your P910i...................................... 10   
					P910i package................................................................... 10   
					P910i overview................................................................. 11   
					SIM card ........................................................................... 12   
					Battery .............................................................................. 12   
					Care instructions............................................................... 13   
					First time start-up.............................................................. 14   
					Turning your P910i on and off ......................................... 14   
					Importing phone book entries........................................... 14   
					Flip closed mode............................................................... 15   
					Flip open mode ................................................................. 16   
					Flip removed..................................................................... 17   
					Screen areas ...................................................................... 18   
					Jog Dial ............................................................................ 19   
					Keypad functions ............................................................. 20   
					Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 21   
					Memory Stick ................................................................... 22   
					Connecting the accessories............................................... 25   
					Services............................................................................. 25   
					Applications - overview.................................................... 26   
					Updating the software....................................................... 28   
					General functions.............................................................. 28   
					MEDIA   
					CommuniCorder....................................................... 64   
					Recording video clips ...................................................... 64   
					Taking pictures ................................................................ 66   
					Camera settings................................................................ 67   
					Pictures and Image editor........................................ 69   
					Pictures ............................................................................ 69   
					Image editor ..................................................................... 71   
					Video .......................................................................... 73   
					Video clips ....................................................................... 73   
					Streaming......................................................................... 75   
					Preferences....................................................................... 76   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					3 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Music player............................................................... 77   
					Playing sound files............................................................ 77   
					Managing sound files........................................................ 78   
					Calendar .................................................................. 113   
					Creating calendar entries................................................ 113   
					Managing calendar entries ............................................. 114   
					Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 115   
					Preferences..................................................................... 115   
					Internet....................................................................... 81   
					Using the browser view .................................................... 82   
					
					Preferences........................................................................ 86   
					
					Tasks ........................................................................ 117   
					Creating task entries....................................................... 117   
					Managing task entries .................................................... 118   
					Moving task entries........................................................ 118   
					Sending and receiving task entries................................. 119   
					Preferences..................................................................... 119   
					Games ......................................................................... 89   
					Chess................................................................................. 89   
					Solitaire............................................................................. 89   
					BUSINESS   
					Messages..................................................................... 91   
					Folders in Messages.......................................................... 92   
					The accounts in Messages ................................................ 93   
					Handling text messages .................................................... 93   
					Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 94   
					Handling email.................................................................. 98   
					More about messaging.................................................... 102   
					Jotter ........................................................................ 120   
					Creating and editing notes ............................................. 120   
					Drawing pictures............................................................ 121   
					Managing notes.............................................................. 121   
					Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 121   
					TOOLS   
					Contacts.................................................................... 105   
					Using Contacts with the flip closed................................ 105   
					Using Contacts with the flip open .................................. 107   
					Creating and editing contacts.......................................... 108   
					Managing contacts.......................................................... 110   
					Making an owner card .................................................... 111   
					Preferences...................................................................... 111   
					Sound recorder........................................................ 122   
					Making sound recordings............................................... 122   
					Using sound recordings as ring signals.......................... 122   
					Sending sound recordings.............................................. 123   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					4 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Calculator................................................................. 124   
					Installing applications ............................................ 140   
					Installing applications on your P910i ............................ 140   
					Removing applications from your P910i....................... 142   
					Sony Ericsson Update Service....................................... 142   
					Time.......................................................................... 125   
					Setting time and date ...................................................... 125   
					
					Setting locations ............................................................. 126   
					Setting number formats .................................................. 126   
					Setting alarms ................................................................. 127   
					Connecting to other devices ................................... 143   
					Connection via SyncStation........................................... 143   
					Connection via Infrared port.......................................... 144   
					Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology ............. 144   
					Viewers and editors – Quickoffice......................... 128   
					Common viewer and editor functions ............................ 128   
					Quickword ...................................................................... 129   
					Quicksheet ..................................................................... 129   
					Quickpoint ...................................................................... 130   
					Pdf+ .............................................................................. 131   
					Synchronization and backup ................................. 148   
					Local synchronization.................................................... 148   
					Remote synchronization ................................................ 149   
					Backing up data ............................................................. 150   
					Restoring data ................................................................ 151   
					File manager ............................................................ 132   
					Online services......................................................... 134   
					SETTINGS   
					Personalizing your P910i........................................ 152   
					Themes........................................................................... 152   
					Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 152   
					Setting a background picture ......................................... 152   
					Setting the light intensity ............................................... 152   
					Setting a screen saver..................................................... 153   
					Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 153   
					Ring signals.................................................................... 153   
					Alarm tones and sound notification............................... 154   
					Dictionary................................................................. 135   
					Searching for a word....................................................... 135   
					History record and bookmarks ....................................... 136   
					Dictionary database ........................................................ 137   
					Settings ........................................................................... 137   
					ADVANCED FUNCTIONS   
					PC Suite and Content and Application ................. 138   
					Sony Ericsson PC Suite.................................................. 138   
					Content and Application................................................. 139   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					5 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Secure tokens ................................................................. 176   
					Storage manager............................................................. 177   
					WIM PIN settings .......................................................... 178   
					Control panel ........................................................... 155   
					The Device tab   
					Application shortcuts...................................................... 155   
					Display............................................................................ 155   
					Flight mode..................................................................... 157   
					
					Locks............................................................................... 157   
					Sounds and alerts ............................................................ 157   
					Text input........................................................................ 159   
					Themes............................................................................ 159   
					Time & date .................................................................... 160   
					User greeting................................................................... 161   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages......... 179   
					Introduction.................................................................... 179   
					
					Manually set up service provider................................... 180   
					Manually set up messaging............................................ 181   
					Setting up WAP accounts .............................................. 182   
					Using your P910i as a modem ....................................... 182   
					GPRS - connection information..................................... 184   
					REFERENCE   
					The Connections tab   
					Troubleshooting ...................................................... 186   
					Bluetooth......................................................................... 161   
					Cable............................................................................... 162   
					GSM Networks............................................................... 162   
					Infrared ........................................................................... 163   
					Internet accounts............................................................. 163   
					Messaging accounts........................................................ 167   
					WAP accounts ................................................................ 173   
					Guidelines for safe and efficient use...................... 192   
					Limited warranty............................................................ 194   
					FCC Statement............................................................... 195   
					Environmental information............................................ 195   
					Declaration of Conformity............................................. 195   
					Terms and definitions............................................. 196   
					Technical data ......................................................... 204   
					Index......................................................................... 208   
					The Other tab   
					Certificate manager......................................................... 174   
					Flip settings..................................................................... 175   
					Format disk..................................................................... 175   
					IP Security manager........................................................ 175   
					Language selection ......................................................... 175   
					Master reset..................................................................... 176   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					6 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Sony Ericsson P910i   
					This product contains software copyright © Beatnik, Inc.   
					1996-2002.   
					User Guide   
					Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered   
					trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.End-user   
					license agreement for Sun™ Java™ J2ME™:   
					Second edition (February 2005)   
					This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB,   
					without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated   
					by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to   
					programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile   
					Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however,   
					be incorporated into new editions of this User Guide.   
					©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2004. All rights reserved.   
					Publication number: EN/LZT 162 21 R2A   
					The Bluetooth™ word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and   
					any use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license.   
					Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian   
					Limited.   
					Memory Stick™, Memory Stick Duo™ and Memory Stick PRO Duo™ are   
					trademarks of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates.   
					Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc.   
					T9™ Text Input is a trademark or a registered trademark of Tegic   
					Communications.   
					1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to   
					all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify,   
					decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software.   
					Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part.   
					2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export   
					control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated   
					regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries.   
					The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and   
					acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export,   
					or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or   
					re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea,   
					Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any   
					country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.   
					Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce   
					Department's Table of Denial Orders.   
					T9™ Text Input is licensed under one or more of the following: U.S. Pat. Nos.   
					5,818,437, 5,953,541, 5,187,480, 5,945,928, and 6,011,554; Canadian Pat. No.   
					1,331,057, United Kingdom Pat. No. 2238414B, Hong Kong Standard Pat. No.   
					HK0940329; Republic of Singapore Pat. No. 51383; Euro. Pat. No. 0 842 463   
					(96927260.8) DE/DK, FI, FR, IT, NL, PT, ES, SE, GB; and additional patents are   
					pending worldwide.   
					3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States   
					government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data   
					and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR   
					52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.   
					Copyright © SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved.   
					Portions of software © PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo,   
					pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation.   
					All rights reserved.   
					Quicksheet, Quickoffice and Quickword are either trademarks or registered   
					trademarks of Cutting Edge Software, Inc.   
					Adobe and Acrobat are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe   
					Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.   
					Microsoft Outlook, Visual Basic, Windows and PowerPoint are either registered   
					trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Unites States and/or   
					other countries.   
					Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of   
					their respective owners.   
					Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved.   
					Apple is a trademark of Apple Corporation, Inc.   
					AppForge is a trademark of AppForge, Inc.   
					Lotus Notes and Lotus Organizer are trademarks of International Business   
					Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					7 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks.   
					This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact   
					your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use   
					a particular service or not.   
					Important   
					Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content,   
					e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by   
					rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable   
					copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional   
					content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use   
					of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed   
					or is otherwise authorized. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy,   
					integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content.   
					Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper   
					use of additional content or other third party content.   
					Note Sony Ericsson advise users to backup their personal data   
					information.   
					Note All pictures are for illustration only, and may not perfectly   
					show the real phone.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					8 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					OVERVIEW   
					Introduction   
					For ease of reference the Getting to know your P910i chapter   
					gives a quick overview of the main functions of the phone,   
					shortcuts and general information.   
					The P910i also contains an organizer,   
					which includes contacts, a calendar,   
					notes and email, all of which can be   
					quickly and efficiently synchronized   
					with a PC. The email application   
					supports attachments. Viewers let you   
					read and edit documents in various   
					formats such as Microsoft® Word   
					and Excel®.   
					Your P910i combines advanced business and entertainment   
					features in one intuitive device.   
					Its camera lets you take pictures and record video wherever you   
					are and use them in a wide range of applications. The pictures   
					can be used in the Picture Phone Book, where they can be used   
					to identify callers.   
					With Sony Ericsson Update Service   
					you can keep your phone updated   
					with the latest P910i software.   
					MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and   
					receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice   
					notes.   
					The complete P910i documentation   
					consists of the following parts:   
					The P910i features advanced entertainment functionality that   
					offers high quality MP3 music and widescreen format video   
					clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly   
					and easily from Internet sites or transferred to the phone via   
					Bluetooth™ Wireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable.   
					Extra memory is available through a Memory Stick™ , which   
					also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and   
					applications such as Java™ games.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Quick Guide   
					User Guide   
					Instruction for removing the flip   
					Help texts in the P910i   
					Complementary information on the Internet, refer to   
					www.SonyEricsson.com   
					The P910i can be used as a corporate phone with Ericsson   
					MD110 and Business Phone exchanges.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Introduction   
					9 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					P910i package   
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					P910i with stylus   
					Battery   
					M 
					Travel charger   
					SyncStation   
					A 
					Stereo headset   
					P910i   
					Protective bag and strap   
					Extra stylus   
					G 
					H 
					J 
					Memory Stick   
					F 
					B 
					Memory Stick adapter   
					Flip replacement cover   
					Flip replacement tool set   
					User documentation package   
					2 CDs, Sony Ericsson PC Suite and Content and Application   
					K 
					L 
					D 
					M 
					N 
					L 
					N 
					K 
					C 
					Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the   
					market.   
					H 
					Note If your package does not include all the listed items above,   
					please contact your retailer.   
					J 
					E 
					G 
					Note Before you can use your P910i you need to insert the SIM   
					card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the   
					charger before you insert or remove the SIM card.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					10   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					P910i overview   
					A 
					B 
					F 
					A 
					D 
					C 
					G 
					E 
					F 
					D 
					H 
					I 
					B 
					G 
					C 
					E 
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					G 
					H 
					I 
					Stylus   
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue)   
					Screen   
					External antenna connector   
					CommuniCorder   
					Flip with keypad and keyboard   
					Battery compartment   
					Connector for accessories and charger   
					Connector for stereo headset   
					Jog Dial   
					Indicator light for network and battery (green/red)   
					CommuniCorder activation and shutter release   
					Internet button for activation of the browser   
					Slot for Memory Stick   
					G 
					Infrared port   
					On/Off button   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					11   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					SIM card   
					Battery   
					When you register as a subscriber with   
					a network operator, you receive a SIM   
					(Subscriber Identity Module) card.   
					The SIM card contains a computer   
					chip that keeps track of your phone   
					number, the services included in your   
					subscription and your phone book   
					information, among other things.   
					
					provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See   
					‘Charging the battery’ on page 13.   
					Insertion and removal   
					To insert the battery   
					1. Ensure that the flip is closed.   
					A PIN (Personal Identity Number)   
					code is supplied with the SIM card   
					from your operator and must be   
					entered when switching on the P910i.   
					2. Remove the battery cover by   
					sliding it downwards.   
					3. Place the battery in the   
					battery compartment and   
					close the cover.   
					Open the battery cover by pressing   
					slightly on its upper part and slide it   
					down the P910i. Insert the SIM card as shown in the picture.   
					To remove the battery   
					1. Ensure that your P910i is   
					turned off.   
					Some subscriptions are limited to call only predefined numbers,   
					so-called Fixed Dialling Numbers (FDN). To avoid problems   
					when travelling abroad, these predefined numbers should be   
					defined as international numbers starting with +, for example   
					+4613244500. In order to speed up calling while at home, the   
					same numbers can also be added in the national number format,   
					for example 013244500.   
					Note It is important that you always turn off your P910i before   
					removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of   
					information.   
					2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards.   
					3. Use your fingernail at the lower left-hand edge of the battery   
					to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outwards.   
					For more information. see ‘Copying contacts to and from the   
					SIM card’ on page 111.   
					4. Take out the battery.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					12   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					4. Wait approximately 4 hours or   
					Charging the battery   
					until the battery meter on the   
					• 
					When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard. The   
					indicator light (on the top of your P910i) flashes red and a   
					battery low message appears on the screen.   
					screen is full and the indicator   
					on the top of the P910i shows   
					a steady green light.   
					• 
					The battery can be charged whenever you want. The P910i   
					performance is not affected. However, using your P910i   
					while charging increases the charging time.   
					5. Remove the charger by tilting   
					the plug upwards.   
					Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been   
					supplied with other Sony Ericsson mobile phones using the same   
					connector plug, for example, T300 or P900.   
					To charge the battery   
					The P910i can be charged either when it is switched on or off.   
					1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P910i and the cover   
					is closed.   
					Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may   
					take up to 30 minutes before the battery icon   
					screen.   
					appears on the   
					2. Connect the charger to   
					the P910i at the base of   
					the phone by the flash   
					symbol. The charger   
					plug flash symbol must   
					face upwards.   
					Care instructions   
					Your P910i is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get   
					the most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:   
					3. Connect the charger to the mains.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Keep the P910i in its protective carry case when not using it.   
					Use a lightly moistened cloth when you clean the screen.   
					Use only the stylus provided to tap the screen.   
					Charging is indicated by the battery icon   
					on the screen   
					pulsing continuously, and the indicator at the top of the P910i   
					showing a steady red light (or green, if the P910i is switched   
					on).   
					See also ‘Battery Use and Care’ on page 193.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					13   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					
					phones is not allowed, or if you want to use the other functions   
					but do not want incoming calls.   
					First time start-up   
					Please read ‘Guidelines for safe and efficient use’ on page 192   
					before you start using your P910i.   
					
					will proceed slowly.   
					Importing phone book entries   
					You may want to import existing contact information from   
					When you start your P910i for the first time   
					another mobile phone to your P910i. You can do this in several   
					ways:   
					1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P910i, keeping the flip   
					closed. The language selection dialog opens.   
					• 
					Beam the phone book entries from the other phone by   
					2. Select one of the languages from the list. Read more about   
					infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to   
					Contacts. See ‘Creating and editing contacts’ on   
					page 108.   
					selecting a language in ‘Language selection’ on page 175.   
					3. Open the flip. Press the On/Off button again. The Setup Wizard   
					starts and guides you through the essential settings.   
					• 
					
					phone with Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes in a PC. Then   
					4. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on.   
					5. Enter your PIN when the dialog box appears and press   
					synchronize this information with   
					Contacts.   
					. Press   
					to delete a digit.   
					Note When you synchronize Contacts with your PC, the SIM   
					information will not be synchronized. You might get two versions   
					of the same contact. See ‘Synchronization and backup’ on   
					page 148.   
					Turning your P910i on and off   
					By default the Power menu prompts you to choose normal   
					operation or Flight mode each time you press the On/Off button.   
					These settings can be turned off. See ‘To use the Power menu’   
					on page 54.   
					• 
					Phone book entries stored on your SIM card are accessible   
					through Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the   
					right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM   
					phone book. These entries can be imported to   
					See ‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on   
					page 111.   
					Contacts   
					. 
					In Flight mode the phone radio transmitter and Bluetooth   
					functions are switched off, but you can still use the other   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					14   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					D 
					E 
					Shortcut to the Calendar application   
					Flip closed mode   
					Shows all applications available in flip closed mode   
					With the keypad flip closed, the P910i can be used as a   
					conventional mobile phone using the keypad to dial and the Jog   
					Dial to navigate. For more information please see ‘Jog Dial’ on   
					page 19 and ‘Keypad functions’ on page 20.   
					C 
					B 
					D 
					A 
					You can open the flip at any time to continue working. Many   
					more functions are available when the flip is open.   
					Applications   
					CommuniCorder   
					Sony Ericsson   
					E 
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					7 
					8 
					Music player   
					Messages   
					Contacts   
					Calendar   
					Tasks   
					Standby view   
					11:20am   
					Call list   
					21/066/2004   
					Applications   
					Jotter   
					Sound recorder   
					The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used   
					applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in   
					standby. See ‘Personalizing your P910i’ on page 152.   
					Selecting and starting applications   
					Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. Press the Jog Dial   
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					7 
					8 
					9 
					CommuniCorder   
					Music player   
					Messages   
					Contacts   
					Calendar   
					Tasks   
					Jotter   
					Sound recorder   
					Connections   
					inwards or   
					to start the application.   
					Tip When   
					view is selected, it is also possible to start an   
					application by pressing its specific number.   
					Closing applications   
					The current application automatically closes and the data is   
					saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another   
					application. To return to standby, press and hold   
					Jog Dial backwards.   
					Touch the Jog Dial to see the shortcut icons   
					A 
					B 
					C 
					Shortcut to the Messages application   
					Shortcut to the Contacts application   
					Shortcut to the Call list application   
					or press the   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					15   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Options menu   
					Press   
					or press the Jog Dial forwards to open the standby   
					C 
					D 
					E 
					B 
					options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, accepted   
					callers and more.   
					F 
					CommuniCorder   
					Pictures   
					A 
					Video   
					Music player   
					Internet   
					Flip open mode   
					Messages   
					Contacts   
					Applications Edit   
					All   
					When the flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. You   
					use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There   
					is also a handwriting recognition feature, so that you can use the   
					stylus to write on the screen.   
					CommuniCorder   
					Pictures   
					Phone   
					Video   
					Calendar   
					LunarCalendar   
					Music player   
					Internet   
					Tasks   
					Jotter   
					Messages   
					Contacts   
					Phone   
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					Shortcut to the Messages application   
					Shortcut to the Contacts application   
					Shortcut to the Phone application   
					Control panel   
					Calculator   
					Quicksheet   
					Calendar   
					LunarCalendar   
					Tasks   
					Jotter   
					Quickword   
					Pdf+   
					Sound recorder   
					Controlpanel   
					PDF   
					Shortcut to the Calendar application   
					Shortcut to the Internet application   
					Shows all applications available in flip open mode   
					File Manager   
					Storage Wizard   
					Remote Sync   
					Demo   
					GPRS data log   
					Chess   
					Solitaire   
					Time   
					Dictionary   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					16   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection   
					capability. Closing the flip generally ends an activity and saves   
					You can use a virtual flip when the real flip is removed. Tap the   
					the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will,   
					Virtual flip   
					Enable virtual flip checkbox in   
					Control Panel > Other > Flip   
					however, continue.   
					settings and select the check box to activate it. When the virtual   
					flip is enabled, is shown on the status bar. Select to   
					‘open’ the virtual flip.   
					You can change the shortcuts A-E. See ‘Changing your   
					application shortcuts’ on page 152.   
					When the virtual flip is opened, the virtual flip keypad is shown.   
					Select to ‘close’ the virtual flip.   
					Navigation   
					When the flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in   
					the flip closed mode move to the top row in the flip open screen.   
					You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected items and   
					by using the Jog Dial, see ‘Jog Dial’ on page 19.   
					Flip removed   
					The flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer   
					applications easier to access. When the flip is removed, the   
					P910i works in flip open mode.   
					Note Turn off the P910i before you remove the flip to avoid to   
					damage your phone.   
					To remove and attach the flip, refer to the separate instructions.   
					Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any   
					liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any   
					disassembly or modification of the product.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					17   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Screen areas   
					Item   
					Description   
					When the flip is closed, you use the keyboard and the Jog Dial.   
					When the flip is open the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen is   
					divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below.   
					A Application Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the   
					picker most common applications. These can be customized.   
					B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder   
					menu on the right. The two left-hand menus contain:   
					• the application menu, whose name is always the   
					same as the application. It contains the system   
					A 
					E 
					F 
					I 
					n 
					te   
					r 
					t 
					B 
					11:03   
					John Smith   
					+4613244500 (h)   
					services used by most applications, such as Find   
					, 
					Send as, and Delete   
					• the edit menus contain editing items such as Cut   
					Preferences and Help.   
					. 
					C 
					B 
					C 
					, 
					Copy Paste, Zoom,   
					, 
					Sony Ericsson   
					With the flip closed, the menu bar often shows the   
					function of the key.   
					C Application Applications use this central area of the screen to   
					End call   
					D 
					E 
					area   
					display the essential information.   
					Many of the applications are based on two standard   
					view layouts: a list view and a detail view.   
					D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that   
					contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all   
					application views require a button bar.   
					E Status bar Displays device status information such as: signal   
					strength, battery and device information, settings for   
					sounds and time, on-screen keyboard, as well as   
					temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread   
					messages.   
					F Title bar   
					Displays the name of the active application.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					18   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Jog Dial   
					Action   
					Function   
					Up   
					Rotate the Jog Dial up   
					Scrolls items in a list up/to the left,   
					increases volume during a call, moves   
					back a page when playing a   
					multimedia message.   
					Rotate the Jog Dial down   
					Press the Jog Dial inwards   
					Scrolls items in a list down/to the   
					right, decreases volume during a call,   
					moves forward a page when playing a   
					multimedia message.   
					Down   
					Selects a highlighted item, dials   
					selected phone numbers. Generally the   
					same action as   
					in flip closed.   
					Inwards   
					Press the Jog Dial backwards Goes back to the previous screen,   
					dismisses dialogs, and sends a busy   
					signal to the calling party when you   
					receive a call. It will not end a call.   
					Always the same action as   
					closed and in flip open.   
					in flip   
					Press the Jog Dial forwards   
					Flip closed: Brings up the Options   
					menu. Press and hold takes you to the   
					Applications list.   
					Backwards   
					Forwards   
					Flip open: Toggles the Application,   
					Edit and Category menus. Press and   
					hold takes you to the Application   
					launcher.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					19   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Key   
					Function   
					Keypad functions   
					STAR   
					Key   
					Function   
					• Enter the character   
					*.   
					• Press and hold to enter a   
					p 
					(pause) character.   
					OK   
					• Press to switch between different input types (for   
					Chinese input Pinyin, Stroke, 123; for Latin   
					input Abc, abc, ABC, 123). This is useful when   
					writing SMS or similar texts.   
					• Press and hold to change between T9 and   
					multitap.   
					• Enter selected function, indicated on the display   
					above the key.   
					BACK   
					• Return to previous menu.   
					• Reject an incoming call.   
					• Press and hold to return to Standby.   
					HASH   
					• Enter the character #.   
					CLEAR   
					• Delete entered characters/digits from the screen   
					one by one.   
					• Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered   
					characters/digits.   
					• Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,   
					Sound Recorder, and Messages.   
					• Press and hold to disconnect the microphone   
					(mute function) when a call is in progress.   
					• Mute the ring signal during an incoming call.   
					• Pause/play the melody when the Music player is   
					open.   
					• Press and hold to select input language. (English   
					or Chinese).   
					• Terminate the input of PIN and security codes.   
					• Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card   
					phone book. Enter the number of the memory   
					position and then press   
					. 
					- 
					NUMERIC KEYS   
					• Enter the digits 0 to 9.   
					• Enter associated characters or perform associated   
					functions. See ‘Shortcuts’ on page 47.   
					• Press and hold digits 1 to open voice mail.   
					• Press and hold digits 2 to 9 to open Contacts.   
					• Press and hold to put the P910i into silent mode,   
					when in the standby view.   
					OPTIONS   
					• Open the menu with different options for   
					different applications.   
					• Press and hold to open Applications.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					20   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Icon   
					Function   
					Indicators and status bar icons   
					Calls screened   
					These icons appear in the flip closed standby screen or in the   
					status bar when the flip is open. When the flip is open, you can   
					often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an   
					application.   
					SMS notification   
					MMS notification   
					Email notification   
					SMS overflow   
					Time   
					Icon   
					Function   
					Signal strength, GPRS available   
					Signal strength, GPRS not available   
					Battery strength   
					Time, alarm set   
					Keylock   
					Bluetooth on   
					Bluetooth discoverable   
					Bluetooth headset connected   
					Infrared on   
					Magic word   
					Keyboard   
					Multimedia volume   
					Speakerphone   
					Muted microphone   
					Silent mode   
					GPRS active   
					GPRS data transfer in progress   
					Ongoing data call   
					Ongoing call   
					Home network   
					Voicemail notification   
					Missed call   
					Divert all calls notification   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					21   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To insert the Memory Stick   
					Memory Stick   
					1. Open the cover for the   
					Memory Sticks provide a convenient way of increasing the   
					Memory Stick slot.   
					storage space in your P910i. You can use both Memory Stick   
					2. Insert the Memory Stick in the   
					slot, with the connector side   
					towards the back (see picture).   
					Make sure it is securely   
					inserted. A click should be   
					heard.   
					Duo™ and Memory Stick PRO Duo™. Memory Sticks used in   
					P800 or P900 can be used in P910i but you cannot use a P910i   
					Memory Stick PRO Duo™ in P800 or P900. You can save   
					pictures, video clips, music, and voice recordings as well as   
					computer data and applications on a Memory Stick and use it to   
					store or transfer the contents for many different purposes. These   
					include:   
					Note Insert the Memory Stick   
					correctly to avoid damage to your P910i or the Memory Stick.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Storing backup copies of important files.   
					Storing media for personalizing your P910i.   
					Storing media for use when composing MMS messages.   
					Storing installation files for new applications.   
					Transferring data between the P910i and a PC or Mac.   
					Providing storage for third-party applications.   
					The Memory Stick supplied with the P910i may or may not be a   
					version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can   
					overwrite existing files without the lock function.   
					To remove the Memory Stick   
					Press the edge of the Memory Stick using your fingernail or the   
					stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the slot.   
					Note Be careful not to drop the Memory Stick when removing it.   
					Renaming a Memory Stick   
					You can rename a Memory Stick to give it a name that is   
					meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the   
					divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					22   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					See ‘Folders’ on page 29. There are two ways to rename a   
					Memory Stick:   
					Sharing data with other devices   
					Your P910i uses the shorter Memory Stick variants, Memory   
					Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo.   
					• 
					Select   
					See ‘Format disk’ on page 175.   
					Select   
					Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename.   
					Memory Stick adapter   
					• 
					File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename   
					. 
					Use the Memory Stick adapter when using your Memory Stick   
					in a device equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick, for   
					example a personal computer. Insert your Memory Stick   
					according to the picture on the adapter.   
					Renaming will not erase any data.   
					Copying and moving data   
					Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick adapter without a   
					Memory Stick into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage the   
					product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the connector   
					end (marked with a triangle) first.   
					For information on how to copy and move data to and from the   
					Memory Stick, refer to ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					Formatting a Memory Stick   
					The phone stops working during the formatting and it can take   
					some time.   
					Compatibility   
					The P910i defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick.   
					Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in   
					one application is not visible in another.   
					Note Do not remove a Memory Stick during the formatting. If   
					removed it will be unusable   
					Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact   
					with the P910i files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by   
					browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick.   
					If you need to reformat a Memory Stick, select   
					> Other > Format disk and tap Format, or select   
					File > Format disk and tap Format. When you format a Memory   
					Stick, you delete all the information on it, including any   
					applications that you may have installed.   
					Control Panel   
					File manager >   
					Memory Stick enabled devices which do not allow you to   
					browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share   
					data directly with the applications in your P910i (for example,   
					Memory Stick enabled digital cameras). However, the File   
					Manager can access these files and move them into the correct   
					folders for use by the applications. When your P910i is   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					23   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					connected to your PC, you also have access to the P910i folder   
					structure as well as other Memory Stick content in My P910i   
					. 
					Personal computer support   
					Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory   
					Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, floppy disk adapters,   
					PC card adapters, and Memory Stick enabled mouses. (Memory   
					Stick adapter required.)   
					For more information about Sony Memory Stick, visit   
					www.memorystick.com.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					24   
					Getting to know your P910i   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					C 
					D 
					The headset is connected to the P910i.   
					Connecting the accessories   
					Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of   
					the P910i.   
					E 
					C 
					E 
					A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear.   
					Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P910i to the   
					car holder.   
					The wrist strap is threaded through   
					the holes next to the connector at   
					the bottom of the P910i.   
					B 
					D 
					Services   
					A 
					You need the following services to   
					use the P910i functions:   
					To use...   
					You need...   
					phone services   
					text messaging (SMS)   
					GSM subscription   
					GSM subscription   
					multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription   
					email   
					email account, GSM data subscription   
					Internet   
					Internet account, WAP account (only   
					for WAP 1.x services), GSM data   
					subscription   
					A 
					B 
					The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P910i.   
					Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the   
					market.   
					data communication   
					GSM data subscription   
					Please consult your network operator and Internet service   
					provider about the services that are available to you.   
					The USB connector from the desk stand is connected to a PC.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					25   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The Demo application can be launched also when the P910i is   
					Applications - overview   
					started without a SIM card inserted. When the P910i asks you to   
					You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the   
					insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the flip is closed, open it.   
					standby view (flip closed) and in the application picker (flip   
					open) to start the most important ones. Select   
					applications.   
					to list all   
					Phone   
					This is the mobile phone application. When the flip is opened,   
					select   
					to start it.   
					Demo application (Not in all phone versions)   
					The Demo application shows some of the most common   
					functions in your P910i. You can release this application to   
					remove memory.   
					Call list   
					The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing,   
					incoming or missed. In flip closed, press the Jog Dial or   
					to call the selected entry. To view the call list when the flip is   
					open, open Phone and tap the call list icon.   
					You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from   
					the Content and Application CD. See ‘Removing applications from   
					your P910i’ on page 142 for how to uninstall the demo   
					application and ‘Installing applications on your P910i’ on   
					page 140 for how to reinstall it.   
					CommuniCorder   
					For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder   
					view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the   
					CommuniCorder button or the Jog Dial to start recording or take   
					a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the   
					screen.   
					To start the demo   
					1. Select the Applications icon   
					. 
					2. Select the Demo icon   
					and the demo starts.   
					Pictures (flip open only)   
					To stop the demo   
					Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo.   
					The demo also stops when any other dialog is opened.   
					Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with   
					CommuniCorder, or receive them via email, Bluetooth wireless   
					technology and infrared communication. Download via the   
					Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image   
					editor you can also edit your pictures.   
					Note When the flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message   
					will not stop the demo.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					26   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
					
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Video (flip open only)   
					Lunar Calendar (flip open only)   
					You can look up the Lunar Calendar correspondence for a   
					specified date ranging from January 1 1901 to December 31   
					2100.   
					Plays video clips. You can record video with CommuniCorder,   
					download them from Internet or transfer them from your PC.   
					You can stream video and audio from the Internet.   
					Music player   
					Tasks   
					Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download   
					these from the Internet or transfer them from your PC. The   
					player supports the most common sound formats. You can save   
					music tracks on the Memory Stick.   
					Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so   
					on, for all your tasks and let your P910i remind you in time.   
					PDF   
					Quicksheet,   
					only)   
					Quickword,   
					Pdf+ (flip open   
					Internet (flip open only)   
					Use it to view and edit various types of documents. Pdf-   
					documents can not be edited.   
					The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It   
					can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java   
					applications.   
					Jotter   
					Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete   
					entry is displayed.   
					Messages   
					You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia   
					(MMS) and email messages in this view.   
					Control panel (flip open only)   
					Contains all settings that are system-wide and affect more than   
					one application. This is the main view to use when initially   
					setting up your P910i.   
					Contacts   
					Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view   
					associated contact data.   
					Note Settings for Flight mode and P910i locks are located   
					under Control panel > Device   
					Calendar   
					The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use the   
					Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to   
					change days.   
					Calculator (flip open only)   
					A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply,   
					divide, calculate square roots and percentages.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					27   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Sound recorder   
					GPRS data log (flip open only)   
					You can use your P910i as a sound recorder.   
					A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your   
					logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P910i creates a   
					new data log when a connection to an account is created.   
					Time (flip open only)   
					Shows time and date. You can set your current location and   
					another. You can also set different alarms.   
					Connections (flip closed only)   
					Set the way you communicate with your PC or other devices.   
					Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and   
					cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P910i   
					synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem.   
					File manager (flip open only)   
					You can handle the content and organization of media, both in   
					the P910i and on the Memory Stick.   
					Storage Wizard (flip open only)   
					Helps you to release memory. The icon   
					bar when the memory is running short. Tap it to start the Storage   
					Wizard.   
					appears in the status   
					Updating the software   
					With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone   
					updated with the latest P910i software. See “Sony Ericsson   
					Update Service” on page 142 for information about how to   
					download the software from the Internet.   
					Remote Sync (flip open only)   
					Performs synchronization over the air. Using GPRS, the P910i   
					can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization   
					server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD.   
					General functions   
					Online services   
					i 
					Your service provider may offer different services, for example,   
					weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact   
					your service provider for more information.   
					Application launcher views   
					In flip open, the P910i can present the applications in two ways:   
					• 
					• 
					List view (small icons appear in one column)   
					Icon view (large icons appear in two columns)   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					28   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In   
					detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of   
					Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts,   
					the current item.   
					Folders   
					jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your   
					contacts in business and personal folders.   
					Using the folder menu   
					In the applications that use folders you can see the folder menu   
					to the right in the menu bar.   
					Folders are also used when managing files of different types on   
					your P910i and Memory Stick. You might want to move or copy   
					sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory Stick.   
					When a Memory Stick is available in the P910i, the folders on it   
					are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you rename   
					the disk (see ‘Renaming a Memory Stick’ on page 22) the   
					divider will show the new name.   
					As you may notice, if you connect your P910i to a PC and view   
					the contents of your P910i in My P910i, it is easier to get an   
					overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on   
					a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific   
					folders to suit your needs and use them to categorize all your   
					information, working with it becomes easy.   
					In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when   
					selected, displays items from all folders (in   
					Contacts, the All   
					folder does not display the entries in the SIM phone book). All is   
					the default value in list views and when an application is first   
					launched.   
					Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in   
					one application is not visible in another.   
					Use the Edit Folders menu item to:   
					For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there   
					is no way of seeing on your P910i, whether a file in an Unfiled   
					folder is located on your P910i or on a Memory Stick, we   
					recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as   
					possible.   
					• 
					Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from the Memory   
					Stick. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit   
					type the name of the new folder, and choose a Location from   
					, 
					the list. Tap Done   
					To Add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and choose   
					Location from the list Tap Done   
					. 
					Every item created in an application is always assigned to a   
					single folder, by default the folder as displayed in the list view.   
					• 
					a 
					. 
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					29   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					To Delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and   
					tap Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all   
					Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and   
					folders can be deleted.   
					Managing your files   
					
					Stick. See ‘File manager’ on page 132.   
					To copy all the files in a folder to another folder   
					You can also use the Storage manager in the Control Panel. See   
					1. From within an application such as Pictures or Video, select a   
					‘Storage manager’ on page 177.   
					folder from the folder menu. From the application menu, first   
					select Select all and then Copy pictures/Copy clips   
					. 
					Zooming   
					2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy.   
					You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between   
					Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom.   
					To move a file from one folder to another   
					Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the   
					destination folder.   
					Automatic saving   
					When you work in an application and leave it, your work is   
					automatically saved.   
					To copy a file to another folder   
					1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the   
					destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application   
					menu; for example Music or Pictures   
					. 
					Find   
					2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy.   
					The Find function searches through all the items stored in an   
					application. The standard Find dialog contains a single text edit   
					box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the   
					search, while Cancel closes the Find dialog.   
					Tip To delete multiple files in an application you can use   
					Storage manager. See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on   
					page 177.   
					In some applications, for example Messages, Find may be more   
					advanced:   
					• 
					The size of each message is so large that you may want to   
					restrict the search to the current message only.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					30   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to   
					restrict the search to the current folder only.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Multimedia message (using MMS): the P910i will create a   
					new message with the item included as an attachment.   
					Complete the message and tap Send   
					. 
					Infrared: align the infrared port of the P910i with the infrared   
					port of the other device. Select Send. Messages on screen will   
					tell you when the information has been transferred.   
					Sorting your files   
					You can sort the files you have stored in your P910i. By sorting   
					your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be   
					displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for   
					example type, size, date, or name.   
					Bluetooth wireless technology: the P910i will search the   
					local area for Bluetooth devices that are set to be visible.   
					These will be presented in a list. Select a device to which the   
					item is to be sent and select Send. Progress messages will tell   
					you when the information has been transferred.   
					Note Sort is not included in all applications.   
					Sending and receiving items   
					From many applications it is possible to exchange items like   
					appointments, contacts and images.   
					Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology   
					enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for   
					example, a destination device was not enabled at first.   
					To send an item using Send as   
					To handle items received in email and multimedia messages   
					1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application.   
					1. Tap the notification icon   
					, or   
					2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose   
					between the following transfer methods:   
					open Messages and select MMS or an email inbox.   
					2. Open the message.   
					• 
					Text messageusing ( SMS): P910i will create a new text   
					message. Add the mobile number of the recipient and tap   
					3. Select the attachments tab.   
					4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary   
					of the attachment will be displayed.   
					Send   
					. 
					• 
					Email: the P910i will create a new message with the item   
					included as an attachment. Complete with address and   
					5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the   
					received item within the related application.   
					subject, and tap Send   
					. 
					See ‘Messages’ on page 91 for more information.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					31   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To receive beamed items   
					• 
					The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic.   
					1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is   
					activated and, for infrared, that the infrared ports are aligned.   
					The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the   
					detail view and displays the selected topic.   
					2. The received item will be notified by a dialog box listing the   
					item(s) received. When using Bluetooth you will also be   
					asked to accept or reject the connection.   
					In many dialog boxes you can select the Help icon   
					upper right corner.   
					in the   
					3. Select View to view the item. Select Done to save the item in   
					the Beamed inbox in Messages. Select Delete to delete the   
					item.   
					Settings   
					For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in   
					the application menu bar. For generic settings, use Control panel   
					. 
					Methods for storing data   
					Your P910i can store data in different ways:   
					Entering text   
					• 
					Internal memory. Used for storing pictures, messages, music,   
					applications, and so on.   
					Entering text with the Flip closed   
					With the flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for   
					example, when writing a text message.   
					• 
					• 
					Memory Stick (expansion memory).   
					SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See   
					‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on page 111.   
					Text entry types   
					• 
					Several other expansion-memory alternatives on the market.   
					There are four text entry types when you enter latin characters:   
					Getting help and setting zoom   
					From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P910i help system   
					• 
					Abc – latin characters; initial uppercase letter, the rest   
					lowercase.   
					or set the zoom level. The help system uses two views:   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					123 – numeric entry only.   
					ABC – latin characters; uppercase entry.   
					abc – latin characters; lowercase entry.   
					• 
					The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both   
					specific application topics and general topics.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					32   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					There are three text entry types when you enter characters in   
					Chinese:   
					To input latin characters using T9 text input   
					You can use T9 text input when writing, for example text   
					messages and e-mail. The T9 text input method uses a built-in   
					dictionary to recognise the most commonly used word for each   
					sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only   
					once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Stroke – Chinese characters; Stroke input.   
					Pinyin – Chinese characters; Pinyin input.   
					123 – numeric entry only.   
					key. Press and hold   
					to change input method.   
					When you are editing text you can:   
					The following example shows how to start writing a text.   
					• 
					Press   
					and select Text options > Language to select text   
					1. Select, for example, Messages > Create SMS   
					. 
					input language.   
					2. For example, if you want to write the word ‘Jane’, press   
					. 
					• 
					• 
					Press and hold   
					to switch input language.   
					Press   
					and select Text options > Input type to select text   
					During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are   
					presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted.   
					input type.   
					• 
					Press   
					to switch between the input types in text edit   
					3. If the word is the word you want:   
					mode.   
					– Press   
					or   
					to accept and add a space.   
					To input latin characters   
					If the word is not the one you want:   
					1. If required, select the desired latin text entry method.   
					– Scroll with the Jog Dial up or down to view alternative   
					2. Press a key to see a pre-edit box with the different characters   
					on that key in the title area:   
					words (candidates). Press   
					word and add a space.   
					or   
					to accept the   
					If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-   
					edit box will be selected.   
					If you do not find the word you want:   
					– Press to go to a list of options.   
					3. Press the   
					cursor. If continuously pressed, the   
					characters and then whole words.   
					key to delete the character to the left of the   
					key deletes several   
					– Select Text options > Spell word   
					. 
					4. Press and hold   
					to start T9 text input, or to close it.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					33   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– Edit the word using multitap text input and press   
					.The word is added to the user dictionary. The next   
					time you enter the word, it will appear as one of the   
					alternative words.   
					• 
					Copy all   
					/ 
					Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for   
					pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor.   
					To input Chinese characters   
					Candidates   
					area   
					Note Multitap input only applies when Latin (English) is   
					selected as input language.   
					Jott   
					4. Continue writing your message.   
					Text   
					area   
					Press   
					to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation   
					and use the Jog Dial.   
					marks, press   
					xian   
					xiao   
					zhan   
					zhao   
					If you press   
					list of options:   
					and select Text options when writing, you get a   
					Phonetic   
					list   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Spell word, to edit the entered word.   
					My words, to view the user dictionary.   
					Language, to change language.   
					Jott   
					Show suggestion list Hide suggestion list, to switch the   
					/ 
					xiao   
					candidates window on and off.   
					Elements   
					area   
					• 
					Use T9   
					/ 
					Use multitap, to switch between T9 text input and   
					multitap text input.   
					• 
					• 
					Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks.   
					Input type, changes the text input type,   
					– 
					– 
					for latin input, between Abc, abc, ABC and 123   
					for Chinese input, between Pinyin, Stroke and 123.   
					1. If required, select the desired Chinese text entry method.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					34   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Input elements; the elements are shown to the right,   
					candidates are shown on top. Refer to the mapping below.   
					Continue inputting elements until the correct character is   
					shown.   
					Inserting symbols   
					When you are editing text you can press   
					on the application, choose Text options > Add symbol to select an   
					item from the symbol selector table. Use the Jog Dial to select   
					and, depending   
					the row and press   
					symbol and press   
					. Then scroll within the row to select a   
					. When the candidate area is invisible,   
					3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.   
					4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.   
					press   
					area.   
					to make the symbol table display in the candidate   
					Chinese key mapping   
					Key   
					1 
					Pinyin Stroke   
					Entering text with the Flip open   
					There are two ways of entering text with the Flip open:   
					2 
					abc   
					def   
					ghi   
					jkl   
					• 
					Use the on-screen keyboard   
					screen.   
					located at the bottom of the   
					3 
					4 
					• 
					Write directly on the screen using the stylus.   
					5 
					6 
					mno   
					pqrs   
					tuv   
					? 
					On-screen keyboard   
					When you need to edit text, tap the keyboard icon in the status   
					bar and then select characters. Tap Done when ready.   
					7 
					8 
					9 
					wxyz   
					You can choose between different types of keyboard layouts   
					using the buttons at the bottom of the keyboard.   
					To input Chinese punctuation   
					The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the   
					keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change the   
					input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down   
					1. Select Chinese input language, and select the desired Chinese   
					text entry method.   
					2. Press the   
					button when no candidate area is shown.   
					menu with Cut   
					, 
					Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text   
					3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.   
					4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.   
					must be selected first.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					35   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To input latin and numeric characters   
					The more you specify the character – the more input you make –   
					the fewer candidates will be left. If there are more candidates   
					1. Select the button representing the characters to input:   
					- Latin characters   
					than can be displayed at once, use the next candidate   
					and the   
					previous candidate   
					buttons to scroll.   
					- Numeric characters   
					2. Tap the keys on the keyboard; the text will be displayed   
					simultaneously in the text area.   
					Text   
					area   
					More characters become available if you tap the shift and   
					caps keys.   
					Candidates   
					area   
					Note The numeric keyboard is equipped with a button switching   
					between full width   
					and punctuations.   
					and half width   
					numerical characters   
					Elements   
					area   
					Character   
					components   
					area   
					To input Chinese characters   
					The P910i has two Chinese input methods: Stroke and Pinyin.   
					( 
					) 
					Both methods require that you create a character in two steps.   
					Pinyin keyboard   
					1. Select the button representing the input method:   
					Stroke   
					or Pinyin (the Stroke keyboard is shown by default).   
					2. Tap one or more components of the character in the character   
					component area. The selected components are shown in the   
					element area, and a group of possible character candidates is   
					shown in the candidates area.   
					3. Tap the desired character in the candidates area. The   
					character appears in the text area and the associated   
					characters are shown in the candidates area.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					36   
					Getting to know your P910i   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The candidates bar at the bottom of the screen can be switched   
					on   
					or off   
					by tapping the button in the lower right-hand   
					Text   
					area   
					corner.   
					Candidates   
					area   
					To switch between Chinese and latin input mode, tap the button   
					at the left of the candidates bar, or write a stroke from down to   
					up with the stylus.   
					( 
					) 
					[ 
					1 
					6 
					[ 
					2 
					7 
					Elements   
					area   
					c 
					& 
					$ 
					3 
					8 
					4 5   
					9 0   
					% 
					# 
					@ 
					Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and   
					drag the stylus over the text.   
					Character   
					components   
					area   
					Stroke keyboard   
					Handwriting recognition   
					Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters,   
					digits or other characters, and displays these characters as text.   
					Handwriting recognition is only active in places where text can   
					be input.   
					Latin letters and Chinese characters are input in different input   
					modes.   
					The text mode screen is divided into an upper and a lower part   
					divided by an arrow   
					at the right edge. The position of the   
					arrow will change according to the current input mode, in the   
					middle when in latin input mode, and above the middle when in   
					Chinese input mode.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					37   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To input latin and numeric characters   
					Latin characters   
					1. If required, select the latin   
					a 
					n 
					o 
					p 
					q 
					r 
					. 
					, 
					input button   
					. 
					Jotter Edit   
					Unfiled   
					b 
					c 
					d 
					e 
					2. Write each letter in a   
					single stroke, in different   
					parts of the screen,   
					depending on the desired   
					letter:   
					« 
					? 
					– Write lowercase letters   
					below the arrow.   
					& 
					@ 
					s 
					f 
					– Write uppercase letters   
					in line with the arrow.   
					g 
					t 
					– Write numbers above   
					the arrow.   
					h 
					u 
					v 
					w 
					x 
					y 
					z 
					a 
					2 
					1 
					a 
					3. If required, select a letter   
					in the candidates area.   
					i 
					j 
					Note Most letters can be written in alternate styles, see tables   
					below. The style itself does not matter when writing uppercase   
					or lowercase, as it is the position of the screen that decides   
					whether it will be uppercase or lowercase.   
					1 
					2 
					k 
					l 
					m 
					Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					38   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Numeric characters   
					To input Chinese characters   
					1. If required, select the   
					( 
					0 
					1 
					8 
					9 
					+ 
					- 
					Chinese input button   
					. 
					Jotter Edit   
					Unfiled   
					) 
					2. Write each letter using one   
					or more strokes, in   
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					different parts of the   
					screen, depending on the   
					desired letter:   
					– Write Chinese   
					characters below the   
					arrow.   
					/ 
					. 
					\ 
					– Write numbers above   
					the arrow.   
					3. Select a character in the   
					candidates area.   
					7 
					a 
					Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.   
					4. The association characters   
					are shown in the   
					association area.   
					Note It is important that the strokes are entered in the correct   
					order, otherwise you may not get the character you want.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					39   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The stroke system has the 33 basic strokes in eight stroke   
					categories. These are:   
					Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name   
					Down   
					Character   
					Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name   
					Long Left Slope   
					Straight Left Slope   
					Short Left Slope   
					Over   
					Character   
					Down-Hook   
					Short Slope Down   
					Over-Hook   
					Over-Down   
					Over Down-Hook   
					Over-Left Slope   
					Lift   
					Dot   
					Over-Down-Over-   
					Left Slope   
					Right Slope   
					Over-Down-   
					Curved Hook   
					Down-Over   
					Left Slope-Over   
					Left Slope-Dot   
					Down Hook   
					Over-Down-Over-   
					Down-Hook   
					Over-Down-Over-   
					Down   
					Right Slope-Hook   
					Over-Hook   
					Curved Hook   
					Down-Over   
					Over-Down-Hook   
					Over-Down-Over   
					Over-Down-Lift   
					Down Over-Hook   
					Down Over-Left   
					Slope   
					Down Over-Down   
					Hook   
					Down Over-Down   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					40   
					Getting to know your P910i   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Chinese punctuation   
					Extended characters   
					To write symbols and characters that are not shown in these   
					tables, please consult the Extended characters section of the   
					Handwriting recognition help topic in your phone.   
					Flip keyboard   
					Located on the inside of the flip,   
					the keyboard is similar in design   
					to that of a standard computer   
					keyboard.   
					With the flip open you use the   
					keyboard keys to enter text, for   
					Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.   
					example, when writing a text   
					Numeric characters   
					message. When you press a key,   
					if there are additional characters   
					associated with that key, then these will be shown in a pre-edit   
					( 
					0 
					1 
					8 
					9 
					+ 
					- 
					) 
					box in the title area:   
					e ee e é ě è ē ê   
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-   
					edit box will be selected. You can also use the Jog Dial to run   
					through and select characters in the pre-edit box. (The pre-edit   
					box will be displayed on screen for as long as you have the key   
					depressed.) When the key is released, the highlighted character   
					will be selected after approximately 1 second.   
					/ 
					. 
					\ 
					Press   
					to delete the character or spaces to the left of the   
					7 
					cursor. Press and hold   
					whole words.   
					to delete several characters and then   
					Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					41   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Press the space key to enter a character space to the right of the   
					cursor. Press and hold the space key to move the cursor forward   
					by inserting 6 space characters at a time.   
					Inserting symbols   
					There are a number of ways to insert symbols with the P910i   
					keyboard.   
					Note When typing, press the keys one after another. Not, for   
					• 
					Press the   
					pre-edit box in the title area.   
					or   
					keys to show additional symbols in the   
					CAPS   
					example,   
					and simultaneously.   
					E 
					• 
					• 
					Use the   
					to access the coloured symbols on the keys.   
					Using the CAPS key   
					Holding down the   
					key for a short time will generate the   
					CAPS   
					The   
					key is used to capitalize or 'caps-lock' characters on   
					symbol selector table. To select a symbol use the Jog Dial by   
					first scrolling through the rows, and select the row by   
					pressing the Jog Dial inwards. Then use the Jog Dial to scroll   
					within the row, and selecting the symbol by pressing the Jog   
					Dial inwards.   
					the keyboard.   
					CAPS   
					• 
					Press   
					once followed by, for example, 'E' to write a   
					capital letter. Any additional keys pressed will be displayed   
					in lowercase.   
					CAPS   
					• 
					Press   
					twice for caps-lock. Any additional keys pressed   
					See “Flip settings” on page 175 how to specify which keyboard   
					your P910i has.   
					CAPS   
					will be displayed in uppercase until   
					remove caps-lock.   
					is pressed again to   
					Using the 123 key   
					The key is used to access the coloured characters and   
					numbers on the keyboard keys.   
					P910i locks   
					Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM   
					card and your P910i from unauthorized use. Use the keylock to   
					prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed.   
					• 
					Press   
					once followed by, for example,   
					E 
					to type the   
					number   
					3. Any additional keys pressed will display the   
					standard characters on the keys.   
					Note You can usually make an emergency call without   
					unlocking the P910i.   
					• 
					Press   
					twice to lock the coloured characters and   
					numbers. Any additional keys pressed will type the coloured   
					characters or numbers until   
					is pressed again.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					42   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					You cannot change the PUK code.   
					SIM card lock   
					The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P910i,   
					PIN2   
					against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK   
					Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a   
					codes which you receive from your service provider.   
					secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2   
					lock.   
					You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you   
					turn the P910i on, or to have the SIM card unlocked.   
					The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed   
					by a user who knows the old code.   
					Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of   
					four to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P910i   
					will ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock   
					the SIM card by entering the PIN code.   
					Device lock   
					The device lock protects your P910i and the data in it against   
					unauthorized use.   
					To activate the SIM card lock   
					If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the   
					P910i is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been   
					changed, the P910i asks you to enter the code to unlock the   
					P910i before you can use it. This means that if someone steals   
					your P910i and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be   
					able to use it.   
					1. Select   
					2. Select a lock option.   
					3. Select Done   
					Control panel > Device > Locks.   
					. 
					An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been   
					entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong   
					attempts (the number of attempts is SIM-card dependent), and   
					you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it.   
					Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your   
					phone has been stolen.   
					The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered   
					the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have   
					ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the   
					SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network   
					operator.   
					The device lock is not on when you buy your P910i. You can   
					change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal   
					code.   
					The default device lock code is 0000.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					43   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To activate the device lock   
					Automatic keylock   
					1. Select   
					2. Select a lock option.   
					3. Select Done   
					Control panel > Device > Locks.   
					This option locks the keys on your P910i when the flip is closed.   
					This is to protect the device if the keys are accidentally pressed.   
					When this setting is active, the keypad will become   
					. 
					automatically locked after a period of inactivity.   
					You can choose to have the P910i locked every time you turn it   
					on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked.   
					To activate or change the keylock   
					Select   
					Control panel > Device > Locks.   
					It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the   
					screen saver. Just mark the checkbox   
					Control panel > Device >   
					To unlock the keys   
					Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock   
					Select   
					> 
					. 
					activated when the screen saver goes on.   
					Screen lock   
					Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you   
					have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your   
					P910i will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver   
					goes on.   
					This option locks the screen of your P910i. This is to protect the   
					device if the screen is accidentally pressed in flip open mode or   
					with the flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen   
					will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity.   
					Note You will not be able to browse the contents of your P910i   
					from a PC, or synchronize items using the SyncStation, when the   
					P910i device lock is enabled and active.   
					To activate or change the screen lock   
					1. Select   
					> Settings > Screen > Automatic input lock.   
					2. Select a lock time or Off   
					. 
					Change code   
					To change a code   
					To lock the screen   
					Select   
					> Lock screen.   
					1. Select   
					Control panel > Device > Locks.   
					To unlock the screen   
					2. Select Change Codes.   
					Push the Jog Dial Forwards > Inwards or Backwards > Inwards   
					. 
					3. Select the code you want to change.   
					4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that you   
					have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it twice.)   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					44   
					Getting to know your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Phone   
					The Phone application is easy for the beginner, yet powerful for   
					the advanced user. It can be used together with the other   
					functions of the P910i, including applications from developers   
					outside Sony Ericsson.   
					• 
					Flight mode which enables the P910i to be used as a PDA in   
					situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The   
					GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched   
					off.   
					The phone includes useful features such as:   
					With the flip closed you can access most of the functions using   
					the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks such as   
					handling a conference calls or using other applications during a   
					call are best handled with the flip open.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Personalized ring types.   
					Picture phone book.   
					Quick access back to the entries in Contacts, making it easy   
					to try an alternative number or send a message if the contact   
					is unavailable or busy.   
					Some options may be hidden or not available depending on your   
					subscription.   
					• 
					• 
					Voice-dialling – make a call by saying the contact’s name.   
					Voice answer – an incoming call may be answered or sent a   
					busy signal, using the words recorded for ‘answer’ and   
					‘busy’.   
					Call handling with the flip   
					closed   
					With the flip closed, you can use either the keypad or the Jog   
					Dial to handle calls.   
					• 
					Incoming call acceptance limit – specify those who should be   
					able to reach you.   
					• 
					• 
					Access to other applications while talking on the phone.   
					Outgoing calls   
					Office handsfree (speakerphone) which starts when you open   
					the flip, making it easy to access applications such as   
					Calendar and Jotter while talking.   
					To make a call   
					Enter the phone number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or   
					press   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					45   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Press   
					delete all characters   
					Press and hold   
					Press and select Hide my number when you have   
					entered the phone number, if you do not want to show your   
					phone number to the party you are calling. Select Show my   
					number, if you want to show it.   
					to delete a typed character. Press and hold   
					to   
					To make a call using Contacts   
					. 
					1. Select   
					on the standby screen.   
					• 
					• 
					to insert the international call prefix   
					+.   
					2. Press the Jog Dial or   
					. 
					3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select a contact.   
					4. Scroll by rotating the Jog Dial and select the desired number.   
					5. Press the Jog Dial or   
					. 
					For more information, see ‘Contacts’ on page 105.   
					If the called party is busy, a dialog box appears from which you   
					can set your P910i to automatically retry to connect.   
					To make a call using voice control   
					To make a call using Speed dial   
					Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special numbers. See   
					‘Set up speed dial numbers’ on page 53.   
					1. There are various ways to make a call using voice control.   
					– Press and hold the Jog Dial.   
					– Press and hold   
					. 
					1. Press the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial   
					contact.   
					– Say the ‘Magic word’.   
					– Press the call button on the headset.   
					The speed dial name is shown above the   
					key. If a   
					When the Magic word function is active, the   
					appears in the status bar.   
					icon   
					picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown.   
					2. Press   
					. 
					2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command linked to   
					the number you want to call. The P910i will connect you   
					with the matching contact.   
					To make a call using the Call list   
					1. Select   
					2. Press the Jog Dial or   
					3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select an entry.   
					4. Press the Jog Dial or   
					on the standby screen.   
					. 
					You can use voice control when the P910i is handheld, used   
					with a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth   
					wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used   
					together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset.   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					46   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Read more about this in ‘Voice control’ on page 58.   
					• 
					Press   
					for the last dialled number.   
					
					Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press   
					the Jog Dial.   
					Incoming calls   
					or   
					When you receive a call, the name of the caller will be displayed   
					if the calling party is in Contacts and the caller’s number is   
					received from the network. If there is an associated picture it   
					will also be shown in a small or large version. See ‘Incoming   
					
					Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for   
					emergency calls and you will be able to make the call as long as   
					you have coverage from a GSM network. Check with your local   
					provider to find out if emergency calls are possible without a   
					SIM card, and which emergency call numbers are supported.   
					You can select whether an ongoing program will remain active   
					when you get an incoming call or if the Phone program shall   
					interrupt it. For settings see “Incoming call behaviour” on page   
					62.   
					To end a call   
					Press   
					, or press the Jog Dial.   
					Shortcuts   
					To handle an incoming call   
					You can press   
					control, see ‘Voice control’ on page 58.   
					to answer the call or answer by voice   
					• 
					Press and hold   
					open, select Phone > Call voice mail   
					to dial your voicemail. With the flip   
					. 
					You can press   
					ring signal.   
					to reject a call and press   
					to silence the   
					See ‘Voicemail’ on page 60 on how to set up voicemail.   
					• 
					Press any of the keys from to followed by   
					An incoming call will bring up the following options:   
					to call a speed dial number.   
					twice to call the last dialled number.   
					Press and hold any of the keys from to   
					your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter.   
					Additional key presses will add letters to your search.   
					• 
					• 
					Press   
					• 
					• 
					1 Answer – Answer the call.   
					2 Send busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a   
					to open   
					busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.   
					• 
					3 Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not   
					notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged   
					as a missed call.   
					• 
					Press any digit followed by   
					in the SIM phone book.   
					to reach a phone number   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					47   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can press   
					or use the Jog Dial to access the menu with the options   
					above.   
					• 
					• 
					Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.   
					Paste number – Paste a copied number to be used for the next   
					call.   
					• 
					• 
					Speakerphone on/off – You can use the P910i as a   
					speakerphone. See ‘Speakerphone’ on page 52.   
					Options during or directly after a call   
					Use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call.   
					Applications – Open another application, and, for example,   
					paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry.   
					Press   
					to get a list of call handling options. The list will   
					vary depending on the situation. Options that concern two or   
					more active calls are described in ‘Handling two or more calls’   
					on page 50.   
					Press and hold   
					Shortly press   
					to mute the microphone during a call.   
					again to reactivate the microphone.   
					• 
					• 
					End call – End the active call.   
					Call handling with the flip open   
					New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold /   
					retrieve the held call. This is useful if you want to make a   
					new call during a call.   
					You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the   
					flip open.   
					• 
					Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry if the phone   
					number of the active call is known, and not already stored in   
					Contacts.   
					Outgoing calls   
					To make a call   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that   
					corresponds to the phone number of the active call.   
					1. Select   
					opened.   
					in the application picker. The Speed dial view is   
					Transfer sound – Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless   
					technology headset.   
					2. Tap   
					on the button bar.   
					3. Enter the numbers with the virtual keypad and tap   
					keypad, or press the Jog Dial inwards.   
					on the   
					Turn on/off tones – You can send DTMF tones with the   
					keypad, ‘Controlling tone-based services’ on page 54.   
					Microphone mute on/off – Turn the microphone on or off.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					48   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To delete a typed character - tap   
					. If you do not want to   
					3. Select   
					. 
					show your phone number to the party you are calling, select   
					Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits.   
					Select Show my number, if you want to show it.   
					To make a call using the Contact list   
					1. Select in the application picker.   
					2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it   
					inwards.   
					If a call is not successfully connected, the P910i can be set to   
					automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is   
					successful, the P910i alerts you with a single ring signal.   
					3. Select a phone number by rotating the Jog Dial.   
					4. Press the Jog Dial inwards.   
					To make a call using Speed   
					dial   
					You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus.   
					P 
					h 
					o 
					ne   
					E 
					it   
					d 
					Speed dial is a fast way to call   
					one of your special numbers.   
					See ‘Set up speed dial   
					numbers’ on page 53. This is   
					the default phone view.   
					Sony Ericsson   
					To make a call using voice control   
					You use the voice control in the same way as with the flip   
					closed. See“To make a call using voice control” on page 46.   
					1 
					2 
					3 
					John   
					4 
					Sandra   
					5 
					Susan(w)   
					6 
					To end a call   
					Select End call, or press the Jog Dial.   
					1. Select   
					bar.   
					on the button   
					Mike   
					7 
					Julia(h)   
					8 
					Robert   
					9 
					2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with   
					the stylus to select an entry.   
					Incoming calls   
					When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in   
					Contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a   
					picture, it will also be shown in a small or large version. See   
					‘Incoming call picture’ on page 58.   
					Elizabeth   
					Empty   
					Empty   
					To make a call using the Call   
					list   
					1. Select   
					bar.   
					from the button   
					To handle an incoming call   
					2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it   
					inwards. You can also tap the entry using the stylus.   
					Use the screen buttons to select what to do.   
					• 
					Answer – Answer the call.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					49   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					• 
					Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy   
					tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.   
					• 
					Paste number – Paste a copied number into a field   
					Tap to make the following adjustments:   
					Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not   
					notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged   
					as a missed call.   
					• 
					Call volume – Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to   
					do with the Jog Dial.   
					• 
					• 
					Vibrating alert – Set when the vibrating alert should be active.   
					You can also answer by voice control, see ‘Voice control’ on   
					page 58.   
					Silent mode – All sounds, for example ring signals, will be   
					turned off.   
					• 
					• 
					Speaker phone – Activate the P910i as a speakerphone.   
					Options during or after a call   
					Mute microphone – Turn the microphone on or off.   
					There are several options available, depending on the situation.   
					You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by   
					tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus.   
					
					Options that concern two or more active calls are described in   
					‘Handling two or more calls’ on page 50.   
					During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an   
					incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call   
					becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background.   
					• 
					• 
					End call – End the active call.   
					New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold/   
					If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you   
					want to release the held call and answer the incoming call.   
					retrieve the held call.   
					• 
					Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry. This option   
					appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the   
					call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See ‘Add to   
					contacts’ on page 59.   
					When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the   
					held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held   
					call will also be finished.   
					• 
					• 
					Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that   
					corresponds to the phone number of the active call.   
					Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					50   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To make and handle a new call during a call   
					Conference calls   
					Press   
					to get a list of call   
					A conference call can be started   
					when you have an active call   
					and a held call.   
					P 
					h 
					o 
					Edit   
					ne  
					handling options with the flip   
					closed.   
					P 
					h 
					o 
					ne   
					E 
					it   
					d 
					11:03   
					11   
					: 
					03   
					1 
					2 
					3 
					John Smith   
					(w)   
					John Smith   
					Tom Clark (w)   
					Ann Jones (h)   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					End active call – End the   
					active call, the held call   
					becomes active.   
					The conference call view is   
					automatically displayed   
					whenever a party has been   
					added to the conference.   
					0123456789012(h)   
					Switch calls – Switch   
					between the active and   
					held call.   
					Anne Jones (w)   
					End conference   
					New call   
					If an incoming call is answered   
					during a conference call, the   
					conference call will be put on   
					hold.   
					End active call   
					Switch calls   
					Start conference call / Add to   
					conference call – Join the   
					two calls for a conference   
					call.   
					Hide parties   
					Start conference call   
					Note Conference calls are only   
					available if they are supported   
					by your subscription.   
					– 
					Transfer calls – Connect   
					the held call to the active   
					call and disconnect yourself from the call.   
					To start a conference call   
					With one active call and one held call, tap the Start conference call   
					button, or select Phone > Start conference call from the menu.   
					– 
					– 
					Release all – End both calls.   
					Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that   
					corresponds to the phone number of the active call.   
					To add a new conference party   
					With the flip open, choose options by tapping the screen   
					buttons, by tapping the field with the other party’s details, or   
					selecting from the menus.   
					1. During a conference call, tap New call and make a new call.   
					2. Select Add to conference   
					. 
					To manage a conference call   
					Use the screen buttons:   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					51   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					• 
					End conference – End the conference for all parties.   
					2. Press   
					and select which calls in the list you want to   
					display. The currently selected view is not shown as an   
					option.   
					Show / Hide parties – Switch between the standard call control   
					view and conference call view.   
					Tip With the flip closed you can press   
					call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P910i.   
					once to view the   
					To speak privately to a specific conference party   
					Tap a party in the list to get the following options:   
					To view the Call log with the flip open:   
					• 
					Extract party – Make the selected party the active call, the rest   
					of the parties will be put on hold.   
					1. In the Phone application, select   
					from the button bar.   
					• 
					Release party – End the conference call for the selected party.   
					2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it.   
					To delete calls from the Call list   
					Call list and call log   
					• 
					• 
					To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls.   
					The Call list available with the flip closed shows calls made,   
					To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >   
					Enter a date > Done   
					received, rejected, or missed. with the last dialled call at top.   
					• 
					To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone   
					> Delete this entry.   
					The Call log available with the flip opened keeps track of date,   
					time, length, and cost information (if available) for each call. It   
					shows all calls in order with the most recent call at the top.   
					To view the Call list with the flip closed:   
					Hints and smart functions   
					1. Press   
					. 
					2. Select Call list   
					. 
					Speakerphone   
					or   
					If you open the flip during a call, the speakerphone function is   
					activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue   
					the conversation while using other functions of the P910i.   
					1. Select   
					on the standby screen to open the Call list.   
					Close the flip or tap   
					to switch off the speakerphone.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					52   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in   
					To set a Speed dial number   
					silent mode.   
					1. Select   
					from the button bar.   
					Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the   
					higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure   
					to excessive volume may damage hearing.   
					2. Select an empty position.   
					3. Select the desired contact.   
					4. Edit the name tag if desired.   
					5. Select Done   
					. 
					Silent mode   
					In silent mode all audible ring and alarm signals are turned off.   
					To edit or delete a Speed dial number   
					1. Select on the button bar.   
					When the flip is closed, press   
					and select Turn on silent to   
					put the phone in silent mode. Press   
					and select Turn off   
					
					. 
					silent to turn off silent mode. When the flip is open, tap the   
					sounds icon in the status bar to open a dialog where you can   
					switch silent mode on or off.   
					3. Select the contact to edit or delete.   
					4. To change the name, enter the new name.   
					To delete a contact, tap Delete.   
					The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated.   
					5. Select Done   
					. 
					Set up speed dial numbers   
					Flight mode   
					Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone   
					numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each   
					speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a   
					number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed   
					dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see   
					‘Contacts’ on page 105. If the contact has a picture stored then   
					this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not   
					have a stored picture.   
					Note The phone and other communication functions must never   
					be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft   
					personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is   
					permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing   
					so turns off the radio function.   
					In flight mode the radio function is turned off so that it does not   
					disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an aeroplane or in a   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					53   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the   
					other functions in the P910i are available.   
					Controlling tone-based services   
					You can use your P910i to control phone banking services or   
					other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual Tone Multi   
					Frequency).   
					A Power menu asks you if you want to start the P910i in normal   
					mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P910i. See   
					‘Flight mode’ on page 157 on how to activate and deactivate   
					this Power menu.   
					The P910i provides different ways of sending tones during a   
					call:   
					Note You must set the Power menu before the flight.   
					• 
					• 
					Pressing keypad keys during an active call.   
					Including a tone sequence in the call setup. Enter the phone   
					To use the Power menu   
					number, then press and hold   
					represented by the character   
					to insert a pause,   
					. Continue to enter your   
					The Power menu has the following options:   
					p 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Phone on – Start the P910i in the normal way.   
					Flight mode – Start the P910i in flight mode.   
					Power off – Turn the P910i off.   
					numbers for the tone-based code. Finally make the call by   
					pressing   
					. 
					To set flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected   
					1. Press the On/Off button.   
					2. On the Power menu, select the option you want.   
					3. Press the Jog Dial,   
					, or tap Done.   
					To set flight mode on or off   
					1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode.   
					2. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now   
					3. Tap Done   
					. 
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					54   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Write digit sequences into   
					a Contact entry for the   
					service. Each digit   
					Your P910i also recognises email addresses and URLs. If you   
					select an email address you have almost the same possibilities as   
					for the phone number. If you select an URL, your have the   
					possibility to start the Internet browser which opens the   
					corresponding Internet page.   
					C 
					o 
					tactsEdit   
					n 
					Unfiled   
					Bank   
					sequence to be sent as   
					+4613244500 p1#1234567890   
					p10#0#34#56789 balance (w)   
					p30#1234#56 account 1 (w)   
					p10#1#5678901 account 2 (w)   
					p20#123456789 (w)   
					tones must begin with   
					p. A   
					space will end the tone   
					sequence and you can add   
					a comment after the space.   
					Once your call to the   
					service has been   
					Support for TTY   
					Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with   
					speech impairments.   
					established and you want   
					to send one of your pre-   
					programmed digit   
					sequences, choose Show   
					contact on the Phone menu   
					to get back to the Contact   
					card with the tone   
					To use the TTY device together with the P910i   
					1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the   
					base of the P910i.   
					2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select   
					the check box to set the P910i into TTY mode.   
					Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the   
					device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY   
					device and the P910i.   
					sequences.   
					Note You should not store any personal codes in your P910i, in   
					case your phone is stolen or lost.   
					You can still make normal calls with the P910i in TTY mode but   
					other accessories such as handsfree will not work properly.   
					Hyperlinks in Messaging and Jotter   
					Do not open the flip during a TTY call. It will impair the quality   
					of the connection.   
					When you write text in Messaging and Jotter, your P910i   
					interprets a number as a phone number. If you select that   
					number, you have the possibility to, for example, call the   
					number or send an SMS to it.   
					Note Support for voice carry over (VCO) and hearing carry   
					over (HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through   
					the phone.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					55   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Support for ALS   
					Corporate phone   
					services in P910i   
					Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have two lines, and   
					two phone numbers, in one subscription. If you are not   
					subscribed to ALS, these dialogs and settings are hidden.   
					PhoneEdit   
					02:00   
					? 
					The P910i can be used in a   
					corporate environment like   
					centrex, mobile centrex and   
					corporate switchboards (PABX)   
					equipped with a mobile   
					extension facility (like Ericsson   
					MD110 or Ericsson   
					Corporate call   
					John Smith   
					Using ALS, you can select which line to use for outgoing calls.   
					You can use the first line for any function, while the second line   
					can be used for speech only.   
					+442745551409 (w)   
					End call   
					New call   
					Call back   
					Intrude   
					Incoming calls can be received at both lines at any time. The   
					name of the line is shown and the ring signal defined for the line   
					is used.   
					BusinessPhone).   
					Programmable feature   
					buttons   
					To select a line for outgoing calls   
					More   
					The preset line is shown by the icon in the status bar. If you want   
					to use the other line:   
					Used in a corporate   
					environment, the P910i provides   
					programmable feature buttons   
					for easier use of corporate phone services. When, for example,   
					you call someone who does not answer, you can press the button   
					Call Back to have the corporate system call you back as soon as   
					he is free.   
					• 
					With the flip closed, press   
					Switch to Line 2 depending on the previously preset line.   
					With the flip open, tap and select Switch to Line 1 or Switch   
					to Line 2 depending on the previously preset line.   
					and select Switch to Line 1 or   
					• 
					2 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					56   
					Phone   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To report that you are busy, click   
					(in standby mode) the PBX icon   
					> Command to send a   
					command to the PBX, such as In   
					meeting until..., Course, or   
					Business trip. The switchboard   
					operator can then answer   
					incoming callers that you are   
					busy and when you will be back.   
					All those commands that you   
					used to dial to the corporate   
					switch can now be replaced by a   
					command button with clear text.   
					When storing numbers in Contacts you should use the   
					international number format, starting with . This allows you to   
					use Contacts when you are outside the corporate telephony   
					environment, when you are abroad, and when you are sending   
					SMS or MMS messages.   
					+ 
					P 
					h 
					o 
					ne dit   
					E 
					Commands   
					Select command   
					Meeting   
					Incoming calls via the PBX may be routed to the P910i as well   
					as to your desk phone, and you can answer in either telephone.   
					When talking on the P910i, you may hand over the call to the   
					desk phone by calling that phone, answering it and hanging up   
					the P910i. You can also hand over a call from the desk phone to   
					your P910i.   
					Business trip   
					Sick leave   
					Corporate voicemail   
					Lunch   
					Gone for the day   
					Vacation   
					Course   
					Configuring corporate phone service   
					Cancel   
					Your corporate phone administrator can program feature   
					buttons, call routing, and commands in your phone via a   
					settings file. Contact him to receive a user guide valid for the   
					company and the configuration file, either via email or down   
					load from the intranet.   
					Using corporate phone   
					service   
					To place an internal call, dial an internal (short) number or an   
					external (long) number. The phone sets up the call through the   
					corporate switch, so that during the call you can utilize all   
					corporate features like call back, interrogation, conference and   
					switchboard operator services. When dialling an external   
					number, you do not need to dial the external line prefix; it is   
					added automatically.   
					See “Corporate phone services” on page 61 on how to install   
					corporate phone service.   
					For more information on corporate telephony go to   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/professionalsolutions   
					Note When travelling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM   
					phone, entering Phone > Edit > Preferences> Calling cards and set   
					the calling card to Call directly   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					57   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					magic word you can also press and hold the Jog Dial or press the   
					handsfree set call button.   
					Preferences   
					In this menu you can change the settings for the phone options.   
					Note Magic word is not supported with the Bluetooth headset/   
					car kit in the P910i. Instead of magic word, push the button on   
					the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should say   
					the name.   
					(Settings on your P910i that are system-wide and affect more   
					than one application are made from the Control panel, see   
					‘Control panel’ on page 155).   
					To set the phone preferences   
					• 
					• 
					Voice dialling – Select or unselect the checkbox.   
					1. In the Phone program select Edit > Preferences.   
					2. Select the item to set up.   
					Magic word – Select the cases where you want to use the   
					magic word when you use voice dialling. You must,   
					however, record a magic word before you can select to use it.   
					Using Magic word will increase battery drain.   
					Incoming call picture   
					• 
					• 
					Voice answer – Select or unselect the checkbox. Tap On if you   
					want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands.   
					You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy.   
					If an incoming caller has a picture stored in Contacts it will be   
					shown on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large   
					version of the picture over the whole screen.   
					Play caller name – If you have recorded a name for a person in   
					Contacts, the P910i will tell you the person’s name when he   
					or she calls you. This is useful when using your P910i   
					together with a handsfree.   
					Voice control   
					The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice.   
					With Voice answer you can use words recorded for ‘answer’ and   
					‘busy’ to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With   
					Voice dialling, you can make a call by saying the contact’s   
					name.   
					• 
					Voice commands – A list of the voice commands. A balloon   
					means that a voice command is recorded for the command.   
					To record a voice command   
					A magic word ensures that the P910i will not call somebody   
					whose name has just been mentioned by chance.   
					1. Select one of the options, Magic word Answer, or Busy and tap   
					, 
					Record   
					. 
					Say the ‘magic word’ and then the name of the person you want   
					to call, and the P910i will try to call the person. Instead of the   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					58   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Say the magic word, the answer command or the busy   
					command after the tone.   
					• 
					Answering mode – Select the option you want.   
					– 
					– 
					Normal – Answer calls as normal.   
					If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you   
					choose a long unusual word, which can easily be   
					distinguished from ordinary background speech.   
					Any key – Press any key (except   
					) on the keypad to   
					answer.   
					– 
					After 5 seconds – P910i answers automatically after five   
					3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording.   
					seconds.   
					4. Select Done to exit.   
					You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred   
					sound device. See ‘Pairing’ on page 145 for information on how   
					to establish connection with the headset.   
					You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet   
					environment to maximize recognition.You also have to select   
					the voice commands carefully, so it does not activate by mistake   
					from environment sounds.   
					• 
					Bluetooth   
					– 
					Headset – Use the headset to manage incoming and   
					outgoing calls.   
					To record voice commands for individual contacts, see   
					‘Creating and editing contacts’ on page 108.   
					Divert calls   
					You can divert incoming calls to another number if for any   
					reason you are unable to answer them.   
					Add to contacts   
					This is a function for adding called and calling parties to   
					Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not   
					already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to   
					add it.   
					To divert calls   
					1. Select the type of call you want to divert.   
					2. Specify the phone number you want to divert to.   
					Set the function On or Off   
					. 
					3. Select Done   
					. 
					Handsfree   
					The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the   
					Specify how to manage calls when the P910i is used with a   
					handsfree kit connected.   
					current settings.   
					Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					59   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Off – The P910i sends a busy tone to the calling party.   
					Accept calls   
					You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers   
					will be rejected. Your options are:   
					Restrict calls   
					You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P910i.   
					You can, for example, protect it from being used for long-   
					distance calls.   
					– 
					– 
					All callers – Everybody can phone you.   
					Listed callers only – Only people on the Accept callers list   
					can phone you.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Contacts – Only people in your Contacts address book can   
					phone you.   
					To restrict incoming calls   
					1. Select the Incoming tab.   
					2. Set restrictions for:   
					– All incoming calls.   
					Speed dial list – Only people in your Speed dial list can   
					phone you.   
					No one – No one can phone you. You can still receive   
					messages such as SMS, MMS and email.   
					– Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for   
					incoming calls when travelling abroad.   
					To add a contact to the Accepted list   
					To restrict outgoing calls   
					1. Select Add new.   
					1. Select the Outgoing tab.   
					2. Select Lookup and choose a contact, or write the name and   
					2. Set restrictions for:   
					number of the contact.   
					– All outgoing calls.   
					3. Select Done   
					. 
					– Outgoing international calls.   
					– Outgoing international calls except to your home country.   
					Tap a contact on the list to remove it.   
					Call waiting   
					Use these settings to control how P910i handles incoming calls   
					during an ongoing call.   
					Voicemail   
					For easy voicemail access, enter the number of your voicemail   
					box.   
					• 
					On – You will be alerted by incoming calls.   
					With the flip closed, press and hold   
					to call this number.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					60   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					With the flip open, select Phone > Call voice mail   
					. 
					– 
					International prefix – Enter the international prefix used by   
					the server.   
					Note It is possible to include DTMF tones in the number. Insert   
					before the tones.   
					• 
					Set up tab:   
					a 
					p 
					– 
					Sending order   
					– 
					Number then code means that the P910i,   
					after you have connected to the server, first sends the   
					phone number you have entered, and then sends the   
					verification number. Code then number means the opposite   
					order.   
					Calling cards   
					Calling cards are used together with some phone services, which   
					means that calls are set up via a calling card server. These   
					settings specify how P910i handles calling cards. Most Calling   
					card settings are protected by the Device lock, see ‘Device lock’   
					on page 43.   
					– 
					Delay for number/code – Set a time delay between the   
					moment the calling card answers the call and the P910i   
					starts sending tones.   
					– 
					Calling card mode – Select how to use the selected calling   
					card.   
					Some international calling card services instruct their users to   
					select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P910i   
					calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these   
					places:   
					– 
					– 
					Calling cards – A list of your calling cards.   
					Selected card – Select which of your calling cards you   
					want to use.   
					• 
					Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a   
					pause sign,   
					Please consult your calling card supplier for more details.   
					p.   
					• 
					• 
					In the verification code.   
					To create a new calling card   
					Select New and enter the account information.   
					In the phone number that you dial.   
					• 
					Access tab:   
					Corporate phone services   
					You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type   
					settings file from your corporate IT-manager. This file can be   
					received via email, stored on the Memory Stick or downloaded   
					from Internet.   
					– 
					– 
					Name – Enter a name for the calling card account.   
					Access number – Enter the phone number of the calling   
					card server.   
					– 
					Verification code – Enter the verification code.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					61   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it.   
					TTY Accessory   
					Select the check box when you want to use the P910i together   
					with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is   
					an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people.   
					To set up corporate phone services   
					1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled folder of the P910i or   
					the Memory Stick.   
					2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards and enter your device   
					AoC - Call meter settings   
					Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls   
					and to stop the P910i from making chargeable calls when a   
					certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge   
					option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current   
					subscription.   
					lock code.   
					3. Tap Import   
					. 
					4. Select the settings pbx file and tap Import   
					. 
					5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card   
					control.   
					6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either   
					If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when   
					there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. When the   
					credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing,   
					chargeable calls are stopped.   
					Always use calling card or Prompt before call   
					. 
					Incoming call behaviour   
					When you answer a call when the flip is open the default   
					behaviour is for the P910i to switch to the phone program.   
					Select the check box if you prefer to stay in the ongoing   
					program when you answer a call with the flip open.   
					Please refer to the Help system for detailed information about   
					the Call meter settings.   
					Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing   
					any changes you make to the Call meter settings.   
					Not all networks provide charging information to the phone   
					during a call. If your network provides this service and your   
					subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make   
					or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network   
					that does not provide charging information.   
					GPRS Alert   
					If you make a new telephone call you can interrupt an ongoing   
					GPRS session, for example, an incoming email. Select the check   
					box to get a warning in such a case.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					62   
					Phone   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					ALS settings (subscription dependent)   
					Use Alternate Line Service to make calls on two lines with   
					separate phone numbers. Some of the phone settings are used on   
					a per line basis. In most cases, the settings displayed apply to the   
					selected line. This is then indicated in the dialog title bar. In   
					other cases, the lines correspond to separate settings or tabs in   
					the dialogs.   
					To set the line tags   
					1. Select the Edit line tags dialog.   
					2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2.   
					3. Tap Done   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Phone   
					63   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					MEDIA   
					CommuniCorder   
					With the built-in CommuniCorder camera you can record video   
					clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and   
					send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia   
					messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you   
					have saved in your P910i via messaging, infrared   
					communication or Bluetooth wireless technology to, for   
					example, a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and   
					pictures between the P910i and the Web.   
					Still camera   
					Still camera   
					Outdoor   
					Set for outdoor light   
					Message   
					picture   
					Set for picture size to be   
					appended to messages   
					Video camera Message   
					video   
					Set for video clips to be   
					appended to messages   
					Recording video clips   
					The pictures in your P910i can be set as background, or they can   
					be added to the contacts in your phone book. See ‘Personalizing   
					your P910i’ on page 152 to find out more about using pictures.   
					You can record a video clip with the flip open as well as closed.   
					To record a video clip   
					A button   
					on the camera activates the   
					1. Press the camera button   
					application.   
					to activate the CommuniCorder   
					CommuniCorder application and acts as the   
					shutter release when taking pictures.   
					2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the Video mode or   
					Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS.   
					The Jog Dial is used to set the   
					CommuniCorder working mode:   
					3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red   
					during the recording.   
					Video camera Video   
					Automatic setting   
					4. Press the Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is   
					Still camera   
					Still camera   
					Still camera   
					Auto   
					Automatic setting   
					automatically saved in Video   
					. 
					Night   
					Indoor   
					Set for dark environment   
					Set for indoor light   
					You can also press the Jog Dial, or, when the flip is open, tap the   
					capture button   
					video clip.   
					at the bottom of the screen to record a   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					64   
					CommuniCorder   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					By default the video clips you record are stored internally in the   
					Delay timer   
					Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to   
					CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.   
					change the storage location to another location, for example, on   
					The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the   
					a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29 for more information   
					shutter release and the moment when the recording starts.   
					on using folders.   
					To set the delay time   
					To send a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed, select   
					Send as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap   
					1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.   
					. 
					2. Tap   
					and set the desired delay time   
					Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds   
					length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video   
					limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size.   
					To record video with delay timer   
					
					2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and   
					a timer icon is shown before the recording is started.   
					Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder   
					settings. With the flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by   
					selecting   
					> 
					. 
					When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon   
					. 
					To delete the last video clip   
					3. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.   
					1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip   
					. 
					2. Confirm the delete operation.   
					Video status   
					To delete a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed,   
					Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show   
					whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and   
					audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left.   
					The calculation is based on the current settings plus available   
					space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the   
					Memory Stick).   
					select Delete clip from the flip closed context menu.   
					To manage video clips, tap   
					to go directly to Video. See   
					‘Video’ on page 73 for more information.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					CommuniCorder   
					65   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To view the last picture   
					Taking pictures   
					1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture   
					. 
					You can take a picture with the flip open as well as closed.   
					2. Select Done to return.   
					To take a picture   
					To delete the last picture   
					1. Press the camera button   
					application.   
					to activate the CommuniCorder   
					
					. 
					2. Select Delete to delete the picture.   
					2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the desired mode.   
					3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is   
					To delete a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select   
					automatically saved in Pictures   
					. 
					Delete picture from the flip closed context menu.   
					You can also press the Jog Dial, the   
					flip is open, tap the capture button   
					screen to take a picture.   
					button, or when the   
					at the bottom of the   
					To manage or edit the picture, tap   
					See also ‘Pictures and Image editor’ on page 69.   
					to go directly to Pictures.   
					Delay timer   
					By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the   
					Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to   
					change the storage location to another location, for example, on   
					a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29 for more information   
					on using folders.   
					CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.   
					The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the   
					shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken.   
					To set the delay time and the picture freeze time   
					To send a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select Send   
					as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap   
					1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.   
					. 
					2. Tap   
					and set the desired delay time.   
					Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder   
					settings. With the flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder   
					In this dialog box you can also set the picture freeze time. This   
					specifies the time the picture stays unchanged in the screen after   
					you have taken it.   
					by selecting   
					> 
					or pressing the camera button   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					66   
					CommuniCorder   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To take a picture with delay timer   
					1. Select   
					Note Depending on which mode you are using, some settings   
					may be fixed (and not user adjustable).   
					> 
					. 
					2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.   
					To change preferences for the camera   
					3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and   
					a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken.   
					1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select the setting you want to change:   
					Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture.   
					Move the slider to change the contrast.   
					When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon   
					. 
					4. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.   
					Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is   
					brighter than the light in front of the subject.   
					Image status   
					Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of   
					flicker from, for example, fluorescent light.   
					Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons   
					show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer   
					status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how   
					many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the   
					current settings plus available space on the storage location you   
					have selected (internal or the Memory Stick).   
					Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions   
					you are in when taking the picture.   
					For pictures, choose quality and size. The picture sizes,   
					640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels.   
					For video, choose quality for video and audio.   
					Larger size and higher quality use more memory.   
					Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and   
					delay time and Video limit for video.   
					Camera settings   
					You may want to change some of these settings if, for example   
					you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You   
					can also choose what resolution, size and quality, you want for   
					the pictures you take.   
					The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflect the   
					quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also   
					the sound quality of video clips.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					CommuniCorder   
					67   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To restore default CommuniCorder preferences   
					1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences   
					2. Tap Default   
					3. Tap Yes   
					. 
					. 
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					68   
					CommuniCorder   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Pictures and Image editor   
					In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P910i.   
					The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder or received   
					via Messages, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared   
					communication. They can also be downloaded via the browser   
					or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P910i supports   
					JPEG, GIF, MBM, PNG, WBMP and BMP picture formats. In   
					the Image editor you can perform basic editing of JPEG   
					pictures.   
					The thumbnail view gives an overview of all the pictures in your   
					P910i while the list view shows a more compact list. At the   
					bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have   
					saved in the current folder.   
					Tip To take a new picture, tap   
					to go to the CommuniCorder   
					. 
					Move among the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial.   
					You can search for specific pictures and sort your pictures by   
					name, date, size or type. Tap Edit to choose how to sort the   
					pictures.   
					Pictures   
					P 
					i 
					c 
					t 
					uresEdit   
					All   
					You can send the pictures to   
					others, add them to the contacts   
					in your phone book, or use one as   
					a background image or   
					Detail view   
					Tap a picture or select it with the Jog Dial to open it. Specify in   
					Edit > Preferences if pictures should open in detail view or full   
					screen view.   
					screensaver.   
					Brioney   
					Mer de gla...   
					In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them   
					into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of your   
					pictures. Read more about organizing files in ‘Folders’ on   
					page 29.   
					Thumbnail and list   
					views   
					Tap   
					and   
					to change   
					Wakeboard   
					Mont Blanc   
					between the thumbnail view and   
					the list view.   
					12 pictures (890Kb)   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Pictures and Image editor   
					69   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Note Pictures with Forward lock cannot be sent further.   
					To rename a picture   
					P 
					i 
					c 
					t 
					uresEdit   
					Photos   
					1. Select Pictures > Rename picture   
					. 
					Zooming pictures, widescreen and full   
					screen   
					2. Enter a picture name > Done   
					. 
					Note Two or more pictures   
					cannot have the same name in the   
					same folder.   
					From the detail view of the picture you can:   
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					and   
					to zoom in and out.   
					Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in   
					the picture.   
					At the bottom of the screen you   
					can see the picture information,   
					for example, the name of the   
					picture and the date the picture   
					was taken.   
					• 
					• 
					Tap a picture to display it over the whole screen. Tap it again   
					
					return to the detail view.   
					JPG-0002   
					10:15am,21/06/04   
					Rotate the Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen   
					view.   
					Use   
					move between the pictures in the   
					current folder. takes you back to the thumbnail or list view.   
					and   
					or the Jog Dial to   
					Moving, copying and deleting   
					Sending and receiving pictures   
					From the detail view of the picture you can:   
					Select Pictures > Send as to send pictures to other phones or to a   
					PC via multimedia messaging, IR or Bluetooth. See ‘Sending   
					and receiving items’ on page 31. You can also save pictures that   
					you have received via email and multimedia messages. See   
					‘Incoming multimedia messages’ on page 95 and ‘Receiving   
					attachments’ on page 99.   
					• 
					Select a folder from the folders menu to move the picture to   
					that folder (internal or on a Memory Stick). See ‘Folders’ on   
					page 29 for more information.   
					• 
					Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder   
					(internal or on a Memory Stick).   
					• 
					• 
					Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it.   
					Pictures in JPEG can also be imported/exported from/to a   
					memory card.   
					Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard   
					so that you can paste it into an item in another application.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					70   
					Pictures and Image editor   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To copy, delete or move multiple pictures   
					Editing pictures   
					Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping   
					the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:   
					• 
					In the thumbnail and list views, select the check boxes beside   
					the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you   
					want.   
					Zoom in   
					• 
					To copy and delete pictures you can also use the Storage   
					Manager found in the Control panel. For more information,   
					refer to ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					Zoom out   
					Select colour Select one of the 16 colours   
					Select pen   
					Select one of the 4 pen sizes   
					Image editor   
					Select   
					Select one of the tools:   
					drawing tool - Pen for freehand drawing   
					- Undo last action   
					Using the Image editor, you   
					can edit JPEG images.   
					- Undo all actions   
					Image editor Edit   
					- Add text   
					- Crop picture   
					You can   
					• 
					• 
					crop and resize the pictures   
					- Resize picture   
					Select rotation Select rotation – clockwise or anti-clockwise   
					rotate them by 90° at a   
					time   
					You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done   
					. 
					• 
					write and draw on them,   
					using different colours   
					Copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. You can   
					only copy and paste whole pictures.   
					To start the Image editor   
					From a picture opened in   
					Pictures, select Edit > Edit   
					If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the   
					last change by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since   
					the picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all   
					. 
					picture   
					. 
					To zoom in and out   
					This is not available in all formats.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Pictures and Image editor   
					71   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					to zoom in.   
					Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged   
					with the picture and cannot be edited or moved.   
					Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in   
					the picture.   
					To crop a picture   
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					to zoom out.   
					1. Tap   
					and select the cropping tool   
					. 
					Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full   
					A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture.   
					size   
					. 
					2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture   
					should be cropped.   
					To draw on a picture   
					1. If desired, tap   
					2. If desired, tap   
					3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture.   
					and select the desired colour.   
					and select the desired pen size.   
					and select the pen tool .   
					To resize a picture   
					3. Tap   
					1. Tap   
					and select the resizing tool   
					. 
					4. Draw with the stylus on the picture.   
					A frame with 4 handles is placed around the picture.   
					2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the   
					picture.   
					To add text to a picture   
					1. Tap   
					and select the text tool   
					. 
					When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized.   
					2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture.   
					3. Enter the text in the text field.   
					4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on   
					the text, style and colours tabs.   
					5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture.   
					• 
					You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging   
					on the text.   
					• 
					You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					72   
					Pictures and Image editor   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Video   
					You can play video content that is recorded with the   
					CommuniCorder, stored in your P910i or streamed. A video clip   
					Video clips   
					is a short video sequence. You can also play audio-only material   
					which is encapsulated within an MPEG file or streamed. You   
					can download video clips from an Internet site or transfer from a   
					PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick. You can also exchange   
					video clips with other phones or PCs via infrared   
					communication, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia   
					messaging.   
					Playing video clips   
					
					overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P910i. You can   
					search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and   
					sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen you   
					can see how many video clips you have saved in your P910i.   
					You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to   
					view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video   
					clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is   
					played with only a short time delay.   
					To view a video clip   
					1. Select   
					> 
					Video.   
					2. Select a video clip in the list.   
					The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for   
					example name.mp4.   
					Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the   
					higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you   
					are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume   
					levels may damage hearing.   
					You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can   
					also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory   
					Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip   
					in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the   
					To adjust the volume   
					Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to   
					decrease the volume.   
					screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Video   
					73   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To copy, delete or move multiple video clips   
					In this view you can send,   
					rename, delete or move your   
					video clips. Only the video   
					clips saved in your P910i or   
					on the Memory Stick (that is   
					not streamed) can be   
					• 
					In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete,   
					move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture   
					names. Then select Video > the command you want.   
					V 
					i 
					d 
					e 
					o E 
					d 
					i 
					t 
					Sports   
					Diving in the ocean   
					• 
					To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the   
					Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on   
					page 29.   
					handled in the detail view.   
					To rename a video clip   
					To sort the video clips   
					Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in   
					the current folder.   
					1. Select Video > Rename   
					clip   
					. 
					2. Enter a video clip name   
					> 
					To record a clip using the CommuniCorder   
					Done   
					. 
					Press the camera button   
					CommuniCorder application.   
					view.   
					or select   
					to activate the   
					Two or more video clips   
					cannot have the same   
					name.   
					Playing   
					0:09   
					
					Tip Use the Folder function   
					to organize all your video clips.   
					Managing video clips   
					The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You   
					can play and pause the clip by tapping and , and stop by   
					tapping   
					To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >   
					Copy to, then select a folder from the list.   
					. 
					To view the video clip information   
					The slider under the video area shows the current play position   
					within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another   
					position.   
					Select Video > Info   
					. 
					To delete a video clip   
					1. Select the video clip you want to delete.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					74   
					Video   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Select Video > Delete clips   
					. 
					from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short   
					delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be   
					buffered.   
					Saving video clips   
					Your P910i can receive streaming multimedia.   
					When you play video clips that you have received via email or   
					multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your   
					P910i from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically   
					launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the   
					video clip to your P910i.   
					Applications   
					
					live applications.   
					To save a video clip from another application   
					Examples of on-demand applications are:   
					1. Select the video clip you want to save.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Streaming of music.   
					2. Select Video > Save clip   
					. 
					Streaming of news (video and audio).   
					Streaming of movie trailers.   
					3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save   
					. 
					Streaming and download of video.   
					Live streaming of music or video (broadcast).   
					Sending and receiving video clips   
					You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See   
					‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.   
					How to connect to a streaming service   
					• 
					If you know the URL of the streaming service:   
					Streaming   
					1. Select Video > Open location   
					. 
					Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia   
					available in real-time. You can, for example, listen to audio and   
					watch video almost at the same time as it is sent.   
					2. Enter the URL of the streaming service.   
					3. Tap Done   
					If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:   
					1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is.   
					. 
					• 
					The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a   
					continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Video   
					75   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video.   
					When you download a video clip to your P910i, it is saved in the   
					download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to   
					empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P910i.   
					The site server will download part of the video to the P910i   
					buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer   
					memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view,   
					described above, and play the video seamlessly.   
					To clear the download cache   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select the Buffering tab.   
					3. Select Clear Cache > Done   
					. 
					Preferences   
					When you view a video clip in full screen mode, you can select   
					the orientation of the picture   
					When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to   
					set the proxy settings.   
					To change the orientation of the picture in full screen mode   
					To change the proxy settings   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select the Display tab.   
					2. Select the Proxy tab.   
					3. Tap Left-handed or Right-handed orientation > Done   
					. 
					• 
					If the proxy settings set in the control panel are to be used,   
					tap Automatic configuration   
					. 
					When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the   
					streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady   
					flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may   
					improve the play-back of the video clip.   
					• 
					If the manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant   
					information.   
					To change the media buffer size   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select the Buffering tab.   
					3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					76   
					Video   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Music player   
					Your P910i has mobile music in the form of a stereo music   
					player. With the music player you can listen to single music   
					tracks or entire folders with tracks. You can download tracks to   
					your P910i from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick, and create   
					different folders with tracks. Your P910i supports a number of   
					different sound files, including the popular MP3 format. See   
					‘Technical data’ on page 204 for more information on supported   
					file types.   
					If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you   
					can press   
					to pause. Press it again to play.   
					Press   
					to go back to the standby screen and launch another   
					application. The music will still play. If this application requires   
					dedicated audio, the playback will be paused.   
					If you use the Music player a lot, it can be useful to create flip   
					closed and flip open shortcuts to it. This way you can quickly   
					access the Music player when you for example want to adjust   
					the volume or change track folder. Refer to ‘Application   
					shortcuts’ on page 155 for more information.   
					You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory   
					Stick. You can also copy them between the internal memory and   
					the Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					Jog Dial control   
					Rotate the Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inwards to   
					play. Press it again to stop.   
					When you receive a phone call while listening, the playback will   
					be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the   
					Music application to restart playing.   
					Tip To listen to more music you can store music on several   
					To adjust the volume   
					Memory Sticks and carry them with you.   
					Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to   
					decrease the volume.   
					Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the   
					higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you   
					are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume   
					levels may damage hearing.   
					Playing sound files   
					You can play MP3 music both in flip closed and in flip open. In   
					flip closed, with the Jog Dial, select   
					select the track you want to play. Press   
					commands.   
					, select Music player, and   
					to find other   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Music player   
					77   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To play a list randomly   
					Track-folder view   
					Select Music > Random   
					. 
					This view is intended for   
					playing entire folders with   
					MP3 files. In the track-folder   
					Music Edit   
					All   
					Sony Ericsson   
					Managing sound files   
					view you can   
					Play,   
					Pause, and   
					Stop the   
					0:00/3:35   
					playback of the current folder,   
					and see the duration of the   
					track. Selecting a track and   
					File list view   
					In the file list view you can   
					see how many tracks you   
					have in the current folder.   
					Tapping a file name will open   
					the detail view, and allow you   
					to play and manage that file.   
					Music Edit   
					All   
					Aeroplane   
					tapping   
					will play the   
					Aeroplane   
					Beautiful Night   
					Rooster   
					Song for you   
					Sony Ericsson theme   
					Standing Still   
					Beautiful Night   
					Rooster   
					selected track and all the   
					following tracks in the folder.   
					Use the slider to move   
					forwards and backwards in   
					the track. Select Music >   
					Manage tracks to move to the   
					file list view.   
					Song for you   
					Sony Ericsson theme   
					Standing Still   
					Stuck with You...   
					Walk on   
					To copy, delete or move   
					multiple files, select the files   
					you want to delete, move or   
					copy, by selecting the check   
					boxes beside the file names.   
					Then select Music > the   
					Loop and random   
					With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to   
					the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop   
					them until you manually stop the play-back. Select the random   
					function to play the tracks randomly.   
					command you want.   
					8 tracks (6806 KB)   
					To delete you can also use the   
					Storage manager found in the   
					Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on   
					page 29.   
					To loop a list   
					Select Music > Loop   
					. 
					Tap   
					to move directly to the track-folder view.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					78   
					Music player   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To delete a track from the P910i   
					Detail view   
					1. Select Music > Delete track   
					. 
					The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap   
					a file name to open the detail view. You can also play and pause   
					2. Select Yes   
					. 
					the file by tapping   
					and   
					. 
					Viewer   
					In the detail view you can move tracks between your different   
					folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them.   
					If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an   
					Internet site, a view similar to the detail view displays. The   
					commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail   
					view.   
					The detail view displays the   
					name of the track, the artist’s   
					name, the album title, the   
					track number, the copyright   
					year, the sound file type and   
					the duration of the track.   
					Music Edit   
					Aeroplane   
					Artist:   
					Unfiled   
					Managing track folders   
					In the track-folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of   
					the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you   
					select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be   
					played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders   
					for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick.   
					You can also use several Memory Sticks for your music, for   
					example.   
					Album:   
					Note The amount of   
					information displayed   
					depends on how much   
					information is available on   
					the sound file.   
					Filename:   
					Aeroplane   
					Date and Size:   
					6:02pm, 21/06/04   
					2107KB   
					Duration:   
					3:35   
					Move between the tracks in   
					the current folder using the   
					In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the   
					Edit Folders command in the folder menu. Then you move or   
					copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more   
					folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You   
					can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu.   
					0:00   
					and   
					buttons.   
					To rename a track   
					1. Select Music > Rename track   
					. 
					2. Enter a track name and tap Done   
					. 
					Two or more tracks cannot have the same name.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Music player   
					79   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note You can send WAV and AMR sound files in multimedia   
					messages, and MP3 and AU sound files as attachments to   
					multimedia messages.   
					Preferences   
					You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be   
					displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a   
					certain type of sound file.   
					To select sound file types   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view.   
					2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include   
					in the track folders and tap Done   
					. 
					From the Content tab you can select the character set so that the   
					content text is properly displayed.   
					Saving sound files   
					When you receive sound files in other applications, such as   
					email and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your   
					P910i. From the viewer you can then save the sound file   
					to your P910i.   
					To save a track from another application   
					1. Tap the save (floppy disk) icon or select Music and tap Save   
					. 
					2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save   
					. 
					Sending and receiving sound files   
					You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See   
					‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					80   
					Music player   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Internet   
					You use   
					Internet, the P910i browser, to:   
					services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the   
					Control panel as well. See ‘Getting started with Internet and   
					Messages’ on page 179.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP   
					pages.   
					Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service   
					provider.   
					To start the browser Start the browser by:   
					– pressing the Internet button.   
					Download Java applications, images and audio.   
					– selecting   
					in the application picker.   
					in the application   
					– selecting   
					launcher   
					The browser can open Web pages that use Java script or frames,   
					but functions that use Java script in the Web page will not work   
					properly.   
					. 
					– selecting a URL in another application.   
					Note If required, you have to enter your username and   
					password to log in to your Internet account.   
					You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access   
					them easily. You can also save pages in the P910i for off-line   
					viewing.   
					While opening a page, the P910i might not receive incoming   
					calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can   
					receive a call and the page will still be open.   
					The browser uses folders for categorising information. The   
					folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents,   
					and Push messages.   
					The application has two views:   
					Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for   
					example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The   
					notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link   
					to the site with the information you subscribe to.   
					Browser view The base view of the application, where you can   
					view Web and WAP pages.   
					Bookmarks   
					view   
					A list view where you can save shortcuts:   
					• to Web and WAP sites on the Internet   
					• to locally stored pages   
					Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet   
					account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP   
					• to documents digitally signed by you.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Internet   
					81   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down   
					list.   
					Using the browser view   
					The P910i can display the   
					Internet page in normal view   
					or full screen view. Use the   
					Add to bookmarks – Enter the name of the bookmark and   
					select the folder to save it in.   
					0:03   
					K 
					J 
					Save page – Enter the name of the page and select the   
					folder to save it in.   
					A 
					Internet button to change   
					I 
					n 
					te   
					r 
					ne   
					t 
					E 
					dit   
					between the views. In full   
					screen view, press the Jog Dial   
					forwards to display a menu   
					with the most frequently used   
					commands.   
					Send as – Send the current URL via text or multimedia   
					message, email, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless   
					technology.   
					B 
					– 
					– 
					Find – Enter text and search for the text in the page.   
					H 
					G 
					C 
					Find next – Search for the next occurrence of the search   
					text.   
					Sony Ericsson   
					D 
					E 
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					Internet menu.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Scan text – Go to the area with the greatest amount of text.   
					Back – Move back to the previously viewed page.   
					Reload page – Reload the page.   
					Edit menu.   
					Go to the next page.   
					Go to the previous page.   
					F 
					Load all images – Load all images of the page.   
					Page information – Show the page information.   
					Bookmarks – Open the bookmark view.   
					Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view.   
					Disconnect or get information about the connection.   
					Go to the home page.   
					G 
					H 
					J 
					• 
					Edit menu   
					Stop loading the page.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Cut – Cut out the marked information from an input field.   
					A secure connection is established.   
					Progress bar, shows the loading progress.   
					Copy – Copy the marked information.   
					K 
					Copy all – Copy all information on the page.   
					Paste – Paste the copied text into the selected field.   
					Full screen – Expand the browser view.   
					Browser view options   
					• 
					Internet menu   
					Narrow layout – Adjust web page to screen width.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					82   
					Internet   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.   
					Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.   
					Help – View help on Internet.   
					– 
					Short forwards – In Normal view, change between the   
					Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a   
					menu with the most frequently used commands.   
					• 
					Internet button   
					Context-sensitive menus   
					The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus   
					pressed on a link or a picture.   
					– 
					Full screen – When you have opened an Internet page,   
					press the Internet button to display the page in full screen.   
					– 
					Normal browser view – Press the Internet button again to go   
					• 
					Text link and picture link   
					back.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Open link – Open the active link.   
					Link information – Show information on the link.   
					• 
					• 
					Handles on the screen – Use the handles on the screen to scroll:   
					Add to bookmarks – Add the active link URL to the   
					– 
					Scroll up and down – Tap the handle to the right of the   
					bookmark list.   
					screen and drag it up or down.   
					– 
					Scroll left and right – Tap the handle at the bottom of the   
					screen and drag it to the left or to the right.   
					• 
					Loaded picture (with or without link)   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Save image – Save the picture in the P910i.   
					Jog Dial   
					Copy image – Copy the picture to the clipboard.   
					– 
					One hand navigation – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial   
					View image – View the picture adapted to the screen   
					slowly to go to next link. Press the Jog Dial inwards to   
					(enlarged or reduced).   
					select the link.   
					– 
					Send image as – Send the picture as text or multimedia   
					message, email, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless   
					technology.   
					– 
					– 
					Scroll up and down – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial   
					fast to scroll up and down.   
					Scan text function – Press the Jog Dial inwards (when no   
					link is selected) to scan the page for text. The screen will   
					navigate to the area with the greatest amount of text.   
					Repeat the operation to find the next greatest area of text   
					• 
					• 
					Not loaded picture (with or without link)   
					– 
					Load image – Load the picture.   
					Voice call link   
					– 
					– 
					Call – Place a call according to the link.   
					New SMS – Send an SMS message according to the link.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Internet   
					83   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– 
					– 
					New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.   
					2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save   
					it in.   
					New contact – Create a contact with the link information.   
					3. Select Done.   
					• 
					Mail to link   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					New email – Send an email according to the link.   
					To create a bookmark to the open page   
					New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.   
					1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks.   
					New contact – Create a contact with the link information.   
					2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder   
					to save it in.   
					Icons within a page   
					Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually).   
					3. Select Done.   
					Damaged picture (not possible to load).   
					To download and upload files, for example, applications   
					• 
					• 
					When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example,   
					applications, images and so on, information on the file is   
					displayed.   
					Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons   
					or select Internet > Load all images.   
					To open a specific Web page   
					Select Yes to start the download.   
					1. Select Internet > Open page.   
					When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for   
					submitting the file is displayed.   
					2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from   
					the drop-down list.   
					Select the file and select Yes to start the upload.   
					3. Select Open.   
					To view information on the open page   
					1. Select Internet > Page information.   
					To navigate through recently opened pages   
					1. Select   
					2. Select   
					to move back to previously viewed pages.   
					to move forwards again.   
					2. Select the Content tab to view the page information.   
					3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the   
					connection.   
					To save a page for off-line browsing   
					4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:   
					1. Select Internet > Save page   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					84   
					Internet   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– Server   
					Using the bookmark view   
					– User   
					A 
					B 
					To disconnect from the Internet   
					A 
					B 
					C 
					D 
					Folder menu.   
					Edit menu.   
					C 
					I 
					n 
					te   
					r 
					ne   
					t 
					E 
					dit   
					All   
					1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD   
					in the status bar.   
					or GPRS   
					) 
					Search Internet   
					My home page   
					SonyEricsson   
					News   
					Internet menu.   
					D 
					2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu   
					Select an icon to view   
					information on the bookmark.   
					Webmail   
					E 
					3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears.   
					4. Select Yes   
					Project home   
					711 time table   
					CSS fonts   
					E 
					F 
					Checked bookmarks can be   
					deleted from the Internet   
					menu.   
					. 
					WIM Access   
					F 
					Select the bookmark text to   
					open the page.   
					When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for   
					example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to   
					enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your   
					service provider or IT department.   
					G 
					G 
					H 
					Select to go to the home page.   
					H 
					Shift between browser and   
					bookmarks views.   
					Signing documents   
					You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation   
					is going to be performed.   
					Bookmark view options   
					• 
					Internet menu   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down   
					list.   
					User authentication request   
					Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the   
					possibility to either select a certificate and confirm the user   
					authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel   
					the connection.   
					New bookmark – Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark   
					and select the folder to save it in.   
					Delete – Delete the selected bookmark.   
					• 
					Edit menu   
					If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead   
					automatically try to connect anonymously.   
					– 
					Edit – Edit the selected bookmark.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Internet   
					85   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– 
					Sort by date / name – Sort the entries. (Available for Push   
					To view bookmark information   
					messages and Signed documents only.)   
					1. Select the check box of the preferred bookmark.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.   
					Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.   
					Help – Open the help for Internet.   
					2. Select Edit > Edit   
					. 
					Information on the bookmark is shown. From the   
					information screen you can:   
					• 
					Folders menu   
					– Edit the bookmark.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					All – Show all bookmarks in the list.   
					– Delete the bookmark.   
					Bookmarks – Show all bookmarks.   
					– Send the bookmark as an email, SMS message, Bluetooth   
					wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message.   
					Saved pages – Show all saved pages.   
					Unfiled – Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder.   
					To delete several bookmarks   
					Edit folders – Categorise your bookmarks in folders   
					(business, personal and so on).   
					1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete.   
					2. Select Internet > Delete.   
					The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the   
					pages and bookmarks stored in the P910i.   
					3. Select Yes to confirm.   
					Icons   
					Bookmark   
					Preferences   
					Saved page   
					The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up   
					your own account. A simple way of setting up an Internet   
					account is to use the Web phone setup-message generator on   
					www.SonyEricsson.com. See also ‘Internet accounts’ on   
					page 163 for more information.   
					Push message from the WAP service provider   
					Signed document   
					To open a bookmark   
					The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask   
					your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message   
					1. Select the bookmark text.   
					2. The bookmarked item is opened.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					86   
					Internet   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					containing the required setup information. The accounts will   
					then be set up automatically on your P910i. To guarantee the   
					integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used.   
					– Select if images should be loaded. If images are not   
					loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images   
					can be loaded manually when viewing the page.   
					– Select if sounds should be played when the page is   
					opened.   
					
					example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular   
					WAP account. See ‘WAP accounts’ on page 173 for more   
					information.   
					– Select if animations should be played when the page is   
					opened.   
					Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway   
					should be set in the WAP accounts. Other proxy settings should   
					be set in the Internet accounts.   
					Security settings   
					– Select if you want to save signed documents.   
					– Select if you want to connect without giving away your   
					identity.   
					To set up the browser   
					– Select if you want to connect using the WIM card.   
					– Select if you want to allow cookies.   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Perform the setup according to the following:   
					Advanced settings   
					Basic settings   
					– Select if you want to be able to receive messages from   
					your WAP service provider.   
					– Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser   
					is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in   
					the P910i or a page on the Internet.   
					– Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP   
					Push messages.   
					– Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is   
					loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel.   
					– Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages   
					automatically.   
					– Select if a new page should be displayed over the whole   
					screen.   
					– Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message   
					arrives.   
					– Select if you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the   
					pages up and down. Otherwise you can use the Jog Dial.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Internet   
					87   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of   
					the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages   
					will load faster when you visit them again.   
					– Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and   
					cookies stored.   
					– Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					88   
					Internet   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Games   
					
					– 
					Played – Select if you want to play locally against your   
					Chess and the card game Solitaire.   
					P910i or against another P910i user.   
					More games are available on the Content and Application CD in   
					your original P910i box. You can also install games from other   
					developers, see ‘Installing applications’ on page 140.   
					3. Tap Play to start the game.   
					To play Chess   
					1. Select the piece you want to move.   
					The square where it is standing will now be marked with a   
					triangle.   
					Chess   
					You can play Chess against the P910i, or against another P910i   
					user via SMS.   
					2. Select the square to which you want to move the piece and   
					the piece will move to it.   
					Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set   
					up and play Chess.   
					Closing the flip closes the game temporarily and saves the   
					session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text   
					message.   
					To start a new game   
					1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game.   
					Solitaire   
					2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialog. You can   
					return to these details later.   
					Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards   
					and up to 4 Jokers.   
					– 
					Name – Give the game a name so you can return to it later   
					if you have to interrupt it.   
					The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles   
					to the layout card while scoring as many points as possible.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Notes – Write a note about the game.   
					You play – Choose to play white or black.   
					Against – Select the level of your opponent.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Games   
					89   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are   
					awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or   
					more rank cards.   
					The game will either start with a new game or with the layout   
					for an earlier, interrupted game. (the game data is saved on   
					return to desktop, when the flip is closed or when the battery   
					is low).   
					When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in   
					the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed,   
					bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then   
					challenged to play a Higher/Lower game to acquire more bonus   
					points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand   
					is dealt with one less Joker.   
					2. Select the card you want to move and it will be higlighted.   
					3. Select the card to which you would like to move the   
					higlighted card.   
					To restart the game during a game   
					Select Solitaire > New game.   
					Rules   
					To undo/redo a move   
					Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move.   
					When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into   
					7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the   
					layout card.   
					• 
					• 
					Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles.   
					To play a pile card it must have a face value of one more or   
					one less than the layout card.   
					• 
					Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can   
					be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a   
					joker.   
					Play Solitaire   
					Solitaire is only available with the flip open.   
					1. Select the icon for Solitaire.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					90   
					Games   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					BUSINESS   
					Messages   
					With   
					types of messages:   
					Messages you can create, send, and receive different   
					– Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard)   
					and calendar information (vCal).   
					• 
					• 
					Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air) configuration.   
					SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text   
					messages sent and received via the network operator's   
					message centre. When a text message has pictures,   
					sounds, melodies and animations inserted, it becomes   
					an EMS (Enhanced Message Service).   
					Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or   
					Bluetooth wireless technology.   
					The different types of messages are handled by separate   
					messaging accounts. Select   
					Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts   
					Control panel > Connections >   
					MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages.   
					A multimedia message can contain text, graphics,   
					animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring   
					melodies.   
					on your P910i.   
					You can have any number of email accounts - a typical   
					configuration will be one business and one personal account.   
					When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for   
					synchronized email is automatically created on your P910i.   
					Email messages. Your P910i mail client supports POP3   
					and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and   
					SMTP for sending mail.   
					You also use Messages to receive:   
					With the flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent   
					and received using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced   
					tasks are, however, best handled with the flip open.   
					• 
					Area Information messages.These are text messages   
					broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example   
					local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area   
					Information services are not available from all operators).   
					Before using Messages   
					Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS)   
					you need to set up the necessary accounts.   
					• 
					BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are   
					different types of messages:   
					– Setup (email, Internet, WAP accounts).   
					– Email notifications.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					91   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					A simple way of setting up an Internet, email, or MMS account   
					is to ask your service provider to send you a message that   
					contains the required information to create an account   
					automatically on your P910i. You can also use the Web phone   
					setup-message generator on www.SonyEricsson.com. Received   
					auto-setup messages are stored in the Auto setup inbox.   
					To save an email message to Outbox   
					1. After composing your message, select Send.   
					2. Select Save to outbox.   
					Messages that you send from an email synchronization account   
					are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your   
					next synchronization.   
					See ‘Getting started with Internet and Messages’ on page 179.   
					Draft   
					Folders in Messages   
					Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent.   
					Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox   
					, 
					To store a new message in Draft   
					Outbox Draft, Sent, and folders you can create yourself, local   
					, 
					Create the message and exit without selecting Send   
					. 
					folders. You can also subscribe to folders based on a server   
					
					account.   
					To move a message from Outbox to Draft   
					Open the Outbox message list, select the message, and select   
					Message > Move to draft   
					. 
					Inbox   
					Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward,   
					and delete messages, but not edit them.   
					Sent   
					Sent contains messages you have sent from your P910i.   
					Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder,   
					especially those with attachments, to clear storage space.   
					Outbox   
					Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are   
					creating several messages, and not using GPRS, you can reduce   
					connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and   
					send them all at the same time.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					92   
					Messages   
					 
					 
				Local folders   
					The accounts in Messages   
					When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears.   
					To create a new folder   
					1. From the folder menu, select Edit folders   
					2. Tap Add   
					3. Name the folder.   
					4. Tap Done   
					. 
					The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are   
					shortcuts for directly creating new messages.   
					. 
					An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has   
					arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox.   
					. 
					Remote folders   
					Handling text messages   
					If you have selected connection type IMAP for your email   
					account, you can subscribe to remote folders on your email   
					server. (To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab   
					settings” on page 168.) By default you subscribe to an Inbox   
					folder.   
					A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can   
					contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin   
					characters). If you create a longer message it will be sent as two   
					(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but will usually be   
					received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other   
					items to your message it becomes an EMS message.   
					Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.   
					Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.   
					See “Get and send” on page 102.   
					Text messages can be sent to one or more people (not more than   
					thirty, we recommend), and you can request a delivery report   
					when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients.   
					The delivery report arrives on your P910i as a text message.   
					To subscribe to a new remote folder   
					1. From the folder menu, select Subscribe   
					2. Select the check box for the folders you wish to subscribe to.   
					3. Tap Done   
					. 
					If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically   
					be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which   
					was already located in Outbox).   
					. 
					The new folders are shown in the folder list. Your subscribed   
					folders will be shown in a flat structure, that is, subfolders will   
					be shown on the same level as main folders. Use the Get&send   
					command to download messages from the folders you have   
					subscribed to.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					93   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					a 
					Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using   
					Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:   
					enter a comma between each address.   
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					Tap   
					to write bold text.   
					a 
					to change the size of the text you write.   
					To format the text in the message using EMS features   
					1. Highlight the text you want to format.   
					2. Tap Edit > Format text.   
					To write and send a text message   
					1. In   
					Messages select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >   
					tap Message > New.)   
					3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font   
					. 
					2. Enter the recipient’s number or select To and select recipient   
					4. Tap Style tab to check the character style check boxes: bold,   
					or recipients from your contact list and select Done.   
					italic, underline, or strike through.   
					3. Write your message.   
					5. Select Done   
					. 
					4. Go to the address tab   
					delivery report or not.   
					and specify whether you want a   
					a 
					You can also use the icons   
					and   
					described above.   
					a 
					5. Tap Send.   
					To save a received EMS item   
					To add an EMS item to your text message   
					Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of   
					item you wish to add.   
					1. Tap the item.   
					2. Select Edit > Save object   
					. 
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					Tap   
					to insert one of the smilies that appear.   
					Handling multimedia messages   
					to insert a picture or an animation. The pictures and   
					animations last used appear.   
					MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include   
					pictures, animations and sound, organized like a slide   
					presentation with time-based control of the playback.   
					Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide   
					presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text   
					and sound. Refer to Technical data, section ‘MMS’ on page 206   
					for supported file types that you can add.   
					– Tap More to get more pictures and animations to use.   
					– Tap New to draw a picture of your own.   
					• 
					Tap   
					to insert a sound. The sounds last used appear.   
					– Tap More to get more sounds to use.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					94   
					Messages   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a   
					multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures.   
					Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an email   
					account.   
					To forward an MMS   
					1. Open the message.   
					2. From the Message menu, select Forward   
					. 
					3. On the   
					mobile number or email address.   
					4. Select Send   
					address tab, select To and enter the recipient’s   
					How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your   
					MMS service and how the receiving phone complies to MMS   
					specifications. Phones can, for example, only receive pictures of   
					a maximum size, video and sound.   
					. 
					To store a received MMS item, for example a picture   
					1. Open the message.   
					Your P910i can help you to create messages which conform to   
					standard and therefore are more likely to reach recipients. Set   
					the Content alert to warn or restrict you. See “MMS Advanced   
					settings tabs” on page 171.   
					2. Select the picture you want to save.   
					3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture   
					. 
					4. Select the storage location.   
					Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using   
					Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:   
					enter a comma between each address.   
					5. Select Save   
					. 
					You can store items both internally and externally. You can also   
					copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.   
					See ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					Incoming multimedia messages   
					To play a received multimedia message   
					Creating and sending multimedia messages   
					You can create multimedia messages in the P910i but you can   
					• 
					Open the MMS inbox and select the new message.   
					also use the MMS editor on the Content and Application CD.   
					The first time a multimedia message is opened it plays   
					automatically. The next time you open the message you can   
					play it by pressing the Play Button (flip open) or by choosing   
					Play from the menu (flip closed).   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					95   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To create a new multimedia message   
					1. In   
					Message > New. or open an existing message and select   
					6. Select Edit > Background colour to give the message a   
					background colour.   
					Messages select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS >   
					7. Tap   
					to add a new page to the multimedia message in   
					Message > New ).   
					which you can insert items.   
					2. From the Select template dialog, tap the name of the template   
					you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank   
					message.   
					8. Select Edit > Page order to change the page order in the   
					message.   
					To enter the recipient’s phone number   
					3. The first page of the new   
					message is now displayed.   
					1. Select the   
					address tab.   
					M 
					e 
					s 
					sag   
					e 
					Edit   
					Draft   
					Select an item from the   
					menu that appears.   
					2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts.   
					or:   
					2 
					1/1   
					Tap   
					if it does not open   
					automatically If you   
					to open the menu   
					Select the line beside To and enter the recipient’s mobile   
					number or email address.   
					CommuniCorder   
					Add video   
					. 
					To insert an attachment   
					select Add scribble the   
					Image editor presents a   
					white background onto   
					which manual graphics   
					can be added. The Image   
					Editor includes controls   
					for pen, crop, colour,   
					scale, rotate and pen   
					width.   
					Add picture   
					Add scribble   
					Add text   
					1. While creating your multimedia message, select the   
					attachment tab, select Add   
					. 
					Add sound   
					2. Select the type of attachment you want to add.   
					3. Select the attachment.   
					Add recording   
					Paste   
					To send the multimedia message   
					Send   
					Tap Send   
					. 
					4. Tap   
					audio or voice to the page. Tap the page to return to it.   
					5. Tap if you want to change the time this page should be   
					shown. Default time is 5 seconds.   
					again to add text,   
					Preferences to a multimedia message   
					Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia   
					message. The following settings are available:   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					96   
					Messages   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Hide number – Prevent your phone number from being   
					displayed in the recipient’s phone. (Subscription dependent).   
					To edit item time   
					For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the   
					item appears and for how long it is displayed or played.   
					Read report – Request a receipt when the recipient has opened   
					your message.   
					1. Select the item so it is highlighted   
					Delivery report – Request a receipt when the message has been   
					delivered to the recipient’s phone.   
					2. Select Edit time   
					3. Set the Start, which is the number of seconds before the item   
					appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning   
					show or play immediately.   
					Editing multimedia messages   
					Here you can see the first   
					page with an inserted   
					picture.   
					4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the   
					remaining duration of the page. To change this, un-check   
					Page time and change the duration to the required value in   
					seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.   
					If you have added video or sound and the page time is longer   
					than the video or sound play time, the video or sound will   
					only play once (it will not be repeated in leftover page time).   
					M 
					e 
					s 
					sag   
					e 
					Edit   
					Draft   
					5 
					1/1   
					10kb   
					To delete, replace or edit an   
					inserted item   
					Select the inserted item and   
					choose an action.   
					You can also tap   
					settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the   
					time settings for each item.   
					, or select Edit > Page time to see the time   
					While editing an image you   
					can add scribble, resize, crop   
					or rotate your image or add   
					text. To undo your changes,   
					select Edit > Undo all.   
					Edit picture   
					Edit time   
					Delete   
					Copy   
					To add or delete a template   
					• 
					To make a template from a message, select Save as template,   
					give the template a name, and tap Done   
					Note If you have accepted   
					changes by selecting Done,   
					you will not be able to undo   
					them.   
					. 
					Send   
					• 
					To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want   
					in the Select template dialog and tap Delete   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					97   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To set the download method for receiving multimedia   
					messages, manual or automatic   
					To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an email   
					1. Select To:   
					• 
					In   
					Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >   
					2. In the Select contact dialog select the check box for each entry   
					MMS > Automatic.   
					you want to send the email to.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can   
					be viewed.   
					3. Select Done.   
					Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using   
					Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:   
					enter a comma between each address.   
					Home only means the same as for On below, but is only   
					valid in your home country.   
					On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and   
					can be read like any other message. There is no   
					intermediate step.   
					Sending email   
					To send an email message   
					Select Send > Send immediately   
					. 
					Handling email   
					If your P910i is connected to the Internet when you send an   
					email, it will be sent immediately and your P910i will remain   
					connected to the Internet. If not, your P910i will connect to the   
					Internet and then send the email.   
					Writing email   
					To write a new email   
					Tip If you are creating several messages, and not using GPRS,   
					you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and   
					then connect and send them all at the same time.   
					Select an email account and select Message > New   
					. 
					If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically   
					be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which   
					was already located in Outbox).   
					To save an email message and send it later   
					Select Send > Save to outbox   
					. 
					To mark an email as urgent   
					On the   
					address tab, select High in the Priority list.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					98   
					Messages   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To move an email message from Outbox to Draft   
					To attach a Calendar entry to an email message   
					1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As.   
					2. Select Email > Done.   
					In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the email (a tick   
					appears), and select Message > Move to draft   
					. 
					If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically   
					be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox).   
					3. Complete the email message and select Send   
					. 
					To attach a Contact to an email message   
					Setting email preferences   
					Select Edit > Preferences to open the preferences dialogue.   
					1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and   
					select Contacts > Send as.   
					– 
					– 
					Email account – The email account you are currently using.   
					2. Select Email > Done.   
					Always attach your card – The entry in Contacts specified as   
					3. Complete the email message and select Send   
					. 
					My card will be attached to your email messages.   
					– 
					– 
					Always reply with history – The contents of the email you   
					replay to is included in your new email.   
					Receiving email   
					Email must be fetched from the email server on the Internet or at   
					your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send   
					function or automatically by requesting the P910i to check for   
					new email at certain times.   
					Signature – The signature you write here ends your email   
					messages.   
					Adding attachments   
					When you forward an email, you can choose whether or not to   
					forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of   
					an email and consequently the connection time needed to send   
					it.   
					To attach an entry to an email message   
					1. On the   
					attachment tab, select Add.   
					2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the   
					item.   
					Receiving attachments   
					‘Send as’ email   
					Any attachments to an email message are displayed on the   
					tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the   
					type of attachment.   
					You can send an open entry as an attachment to a new email   
					from multimedia applications, document editors, Internet,   
					Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Jotter. You can use this service if   
					Send as is available in the application’s main menu.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					99   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of   
					file.Your P910i comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft   
					Word, Excel, and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files.   
					In your list of messages, headers are denoted by   
					. 
					To download the full message   
					1. In your list of messages, select the header.   
					2. The dialog Download, Yes/No appears.   
					To save an attachment, for example a picture   
					1. Open the email message and select the   
					tab.   
					3. Select Yes   
					. 
					2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application.   
					To download a series of messages   
					3. Select Pictures > Save   
					. 
					1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of   
					each entry (a tick appears).   
					4. Select the location where you want to store the message.   
					5. Select Save   
					. 
					2. Select Get & Send   
					. 
					You can store items both internally and externally. You can also   
					copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.   
					See ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					Deleting messages   
					You can delete messages both locally and in your email server.   
					Downloading   
					To delete a message locally   
					You can choose not to download large messages and receive just   
					a header instead. A header contains the subject line, sender’s   
					details, and date, but not the full message.   
					1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the   
					message header.   
					2. Select Message > Local delete.   
					To specify a size limit for email, above which you only receive   
					a header   
					3. Select Yes   
					. 
					The message body and attachments are deleted but the heading   
					remains. You can download the message again later.   
					1. Select   
					Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >   
					Email (select the email account) > Edit.   
					To delete a message both locally and in your email server   
					2. Select Inbox.   
					1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the   
					message header.   
					3. Select an option from the Download list.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					100   
					Messages   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Select Message > Delete message.   
					Disconnecting and connecting   
					If your P910i is already connected to the Internet when you send   
					an email, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P910i   
					is not connected before sending an email, it will connect and   
					send the message, and then disconnect.   
					3. Select Yes   
					. 
					The message is deleted in your P910i and in your email server   
					and will no longer be visible in your message list.   
					Note You can send text messages while connected to the   
					Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be   
					disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call.   
					If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a   
					phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the   
					data activity (Web page fetch, get email) after the call has   
					ended.   
					Downloading email automatically   
					You can schedule your email messages to be downloaded   
					automatically at certain times.   
					To download your email automatically   
					1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >   
					Email.   
					2. Select the required email account and select Edit.   
					3. Select Inbox > Schedule.   
					If your P910i cannot connect to the email account, automatic   
					download will fail, and   
					account.   
					will be displayed next to the email   
					4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done   
					. 
					A scheduled download will fail if your P910i is engaged in a   
					voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is,   
					through a different Internet account than specified for the email   
					account.   
					If email messages are not downloaded because a scheduled   
					download fails, they will be downloaded during the next   
					successful connection.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					101   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note If the email account is set up to access the mail server   
					More about messaging   
					through a Secure access connection (see ‘Secure tokens’ on   
					page 176) you must have the flip open when you use Get&send   
					. 
					If the flip is closed you will see an error message.   
					Finding messages   
					In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches   
					through the subject lines, senders’ details, the text of the   
					message.   
					Mark read and unread   
					Use commands on the Edit menu to mark your received   
					messages read or unread. You can also make P910i show just   
					unread messages. If you have selected connection type IMAP for   
					your email account, the read or unread status will be updated for   
					the messages on the server the next time you use the Get&send   
					command.   
					In an open message, Find searches through the text of the   
					message and highlights the text it finds.   
					You can only search through email messages that have been   
					fully downloaded.   
					If you have changed the read or unread status for the messages   
					on the server, for example from your PC, the read and unread   
					status will change accordingly on your P910i.   
					Get and send   
					To get and send messages for one specific account   
					To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab   
					settings” on page 168.   
					1. Select   
					Messages.   
					Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.   
					Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.   
					2. Select the desired account (MMS or email for example).   
					3. Select Get&send.   
					Full screen view   
					To get and send messages for all your accounts   
					Use the command Edit > Full screen to view your email messages   
					and MMS in full screen. You can also edit email in full screen.   
					Set your P910i to open email messages in full screen view by   
					default, see “Email account Inbox tab settings” on page 169,   
					and to play received MMS in full screen by default, see “MMS   
					Advanced settings tabs” on page 171.   
					1. Select   
					Messages.   
					2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your   
					Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet   
					downloaded will be downloaded to your P910i.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					102   
					Messages   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Saving contact details   
					When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of   
					the person who sent you the message.   
					If your service provider or network is   
					unavailable   
					Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P910i cannot   
					connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account   
					and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct.   
					To save the sender’s details   
					On the message’s   
					address tab, select From.   
					If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try   
					sending the email message using an account of the other type.   
					GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up   
					Internet accounts use the GSM network.   
					Note If you save an address from an email message   
					synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of   
					the address, rather than the full Internet email address, will be   
					saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not   
					an Internet address (an X.400 address, or just the sender's   
					name, for example), you can use it to send email from your   
					synchronized account, but you cannot use it in email that you   
					send directly from your P910i.   
					Synchronized email   
					When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for   
					synchronized email messages is automatically created on your   
					P910i and indicated by   
					. You can have more than one   
					account for synchronized email, but only one per PC. If you   
					send an email as PC mail, the mail will be sent via the PC when   
					you have synchronized your P910i with the PC.   
					Connecting and disconnecting from the   
					Internet   
					If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same   
					mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages.   
					Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the   
					copies in each account are separate.   
					To disconnect from the Internet   
					1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD   
					in the status bar.   
					or GPRS   
					) 
					2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu   
					3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect from Internet?, Yes/No   
					appears.   
					4. Select Yes   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Messages   
					103   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Area information   
					Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all   
					subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic   
					report. When you receive an area information message, the   
					message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss   
					the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is   
					replaced by a new message received on the same channel.   
					Please consult your service provider for more information about   
					the availability of area information services and area   
					information channel numbering. See ‘‘Area tab’ on page 172 for   
					more information.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					104   
					Messages   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Contacts   
					Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names,   
					phone numbers, email addresses and other useful information,   
					including photos.   
					Menus   
					In both list view and detail view, you can use   
					some of the P910i’s contact functions. The options will vary   
					depending on the situation.   
					to access   
					The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM   
					entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be   
					copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers   
					and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator.   
					These numbers are useful for service and information, and are   
					accessible from the SIM within Contacts.   
					Menu options in list view   
					• 
					• 
					SIM – Display the contacts of the SIM card.   
					Send owner card – Send your owner card (See ‘Making an   
					owner card’ on page 111) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless   
					technology.   
					You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the   
					PIM applications in your PC supported by the P910i. See   
					‘Synchronization and backup’ on page 148.   
					• 
					• 
					Find – Search for a specific contact.   
					Undo delete – Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear   
					only if there is something to undo.   
					• 
					# Applications – Access the application list view.   
					Using Contacts with the flip   
					closed   
					Menu options in detail view   
					Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of   
					contact detail, for example mobile number, that is highlighted.)   
					With the flip closed, you can make calls and send text or   
					multimedia messages.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Send SMS – Send a multimedia message to the active contact   
					Send MMS – Send a text message to the active contact.   
					Call – Call the active contact.   
					Contacts has two views when the flip is closed:   
					An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the   
					starting point for finding a contact.   
					List view   
					The details for a contact.   
					Detail view   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Contacts   
					105   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Send as – Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth   
					wireless technology.   
					3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press   
					the detail view for a contact.   
					to open   
					• 
					• 
					Delete contact – Delete the active contact.   
					To return to the list view, press   
					. 
					# Applications – Will access the application list view.   
					Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the   
					options menu. If there are service numbers or information   
					numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them.   
					Menu options in SIM   
					• 
					• 
					View all – Switch to Contacts list.   
					To make a call   
					Service numbers – Display the service numbers on the SIM   
					card. This option is only displayed if there are service   
					numbers stored on the SIM card.   
					1. Select a phone number.   
					2. Press the Jog Dial or press   
					. 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Information numbers – As for service numbers above.   
					Find – Search for a specific contact.   
					or   
					1. Select a phone number.   
					# Applications – Will access the application list view.   
					2. Select Call from the options menu.   
					To send a text message   
					Selecting a contact with the flip closed   
					1. Select a phone number.   
					To select a contact   
					2. Select Send SMS from the options menu.   
					1. Select   
					. 
					To send a multimedia message   
					1. Select a phone number.   
					2. Then either:   
					– Scroll down to the desired contact.   
					2. Select Send MMS from the options menu.   
					– Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the   
					first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue   
					to enter the letters with the keys.   
					– Select Find from the menu and search for the contact.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					106   
					Contacts   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To add a contact   
					The details for a contact.   
					Detail view   
					Edit view   
					Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you   
					to add and change the information.   
					You can create a new contact using information from a recently   
					received voice call or message. See also ‘Add to contacts’ on   
					page 59.   
					Tabs at the bottom of the list help you to find a contact fast. To   
					highlight the first entry that begins with the first character on a   
					tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins   
					with the next character on the tab, select the tab again.   
					1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts.   
					2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required.   
					The entries are arranged in Stroke order. If you have selected   
					English as language, see ‘Language selection’ on page 175, the   
					entries are arranged in Latin alphabetic order.   
					To delete a contact   
					1. Select the contact.   
					2. Select Delete contact from the options menu.   
					Stroke order   
					• 
					
					options menu.   
					Contacts in Latin letters are sorted under the first three tabs,   
					contacts in Chinese characters under the other tabs.   
					Using Contacts with the flip   
					open   
					Latin order   
					abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z   
					Open the flip and tap   
					launcher   
					or select Contacts in the Application   
					to open Contacts.   
					Latin entries are arranged in alphabetic order. Chinese entries   
					are sorted after the entries in Latin characters under the last tab.   
					Contacts has three views when the flip is open:   
					An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the   
					starting point for finding a contact.   
					List view   
					Making a call with the flip open   
					To open Contacts   
					Tap   
					or select Contacts in the Application launcher   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Contacts   
					107   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To make a call   
					Creating and editing contacts   
					1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu.   
					You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or   
					2. Scroll down to the desired contact.   
					company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such   
					If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the   
					view.   
					as Business or Personal   
					. 
					To create a new contact   
					3. Select the contact to display the contact details.   
					1. Select Contacts > New   
					. 
					4. Depending on what you want to do, make one of the   
					following choices:   
					2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from   
					the drop-down menus.   
					– Select   
					– Select   
					– Select   
					– Select   
					– Select   
					or   
					or the phone number to make a call.   
					or the email address to send an email.   
					or the URL to open a Web page.   
					to send a multimedia message.   
					to send a text message.   
					To add a field to a contact   
					1. Select the contact.   
					2. Select Edit > Edit contact.   
					3. Select Edit > Add field.   
					4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list.   
					5. Select Add.   
					Using service and information numbers   
					To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM   
					card   
					To add a DTMF tone sequence   
					1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h)   
					. 
					1. Select SIM in the folders menu.   
					Add a new field if necessary.   
					2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and   
					select a phone number or select a sub-category and then a   
					phone number.   
					2. Enter a   
					p 
					and then the tone digits. Enter a to insert a pause.   
					p 
					It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the   
					phone recognises it as a tone sequence.   
					3. Select Call   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					108   
					Contacts   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call   
					To add a photo or other picture to a contact   
					1. During a call, open the contact’s detail view.   
					1. Select the photo view tab   
					2. Tap the picture space.   
					3. If required, change folder.   
					4. Select the picture to use.   
					5. Tap the Select button.   
					. 
					2. Tap   
					at the tone sequence.   
					Read more about DTMF tones in ‘Controlling tone-based   
					services’ on page 54.   
					To add a voice dialling command   
					Contacts with a voice dialling command are shown in Voice   
					commands in the folders menu.   
					• 
					To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace   
					image.   
					• 
					To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image.   
					1. Select   
					at the bottom of the screen.   
					2. Select a number.   
					To personalize the ring melody for a contact   
					Contacts with a personalized ring melody are shown in Personal   
					ring type in the folders menu.   
					3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the   
					tone.   
					4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording.   
					1. Against Ring Tone, select Find sound from the drop-down   
					menu.   
					• 
					To remove a voice command, select the Del button.   
					2. If required, change folder.   
					3. Select the required sound.   
					To add a note to a contact   
					1. Select   
					. 
					4. Tap   
					and   
					to preview the sound.   
					2. Enter the text.   
					5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact.   
					3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send,   
					beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check   
					box.   
					Note The selected ring melody will only be played if the   
					network provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) to enable the   
					contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be   
					played.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Contacts   
					109   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted   
					See ‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31 for information   
					or moved, the Default Melody will be played.   
					about how to receive contacts from another device.   
					To change the details of a contact   
					1. Select a contact.   
					To move, send or delete a contact   
					1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager   
					. 
					2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab.   
					2. Select the contacts you want to manage.   
					(If required, change folder from the Folders menu. Selecting   
					All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the   
					SIM. Clicking the Select all check box will select all the   
					contacts in the current folder.)   
					3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select   
					from the drop-down menus.   
					To delete a contact   
					3. Select Send / Move / Delete   
					. 
					1. Select the contact.   
					4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a   
					sending method.   
					2. Select Contacts > Delete contact.   
					To create or edit a contact on the SIM card   
					5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action.   
					1. Select SIM from the Folders menu.   
					To search for an entry containing specific text   
					1. Select Contacts > Find.   
					2. Create or edit the contact as described above.   
					All options are, however, not available for the SIM card   
					contacts.   
					2. Enter the text string you wish to search for.   
					3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find.   
					4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed.   
					Managing contacts   
					You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the   
					folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete   
					them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with   
					Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to   
					enter an entire word to locate a matching entry.   
					the Contacts manager   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					110   
					Contacts   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card   
					. 
					Copying contacts to and from the SIM card   
					You can also copy information between the contacts list and the   
					SIM card.   
					Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail   
					view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as owner card   
					. 
					To copy contacts from the SIM card   
					To send your owner card   
					1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar.   
					1. Open the list view, and then select Contacts > Send owner card   
					2. Send the card using Send as   
					. 
					2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries   
					or   
					. 
					Read more about sending items in ‘Sending and receiving items’   
					on page 31.   
					Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to   
					copy the selected SIM entry.   
					To view or edit your owner card   
					To copy contacts to the SIM card   
					• 
					Select Contacts > View owner card.   
					1. Select a contact.   
					2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card   
					. 
					Preferences   
					If the contact has multiple phone numbers each number will be   
					created as a separate entry in the SIM phone book.   
					Contacts tab   
					Making an owner card   
					To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number   
					You can create an electronic business card, containing your   
					contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send   
					this card to another device.   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or   
					company) and tap Done.   
					To create your owner card   
					3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in   
					list view, select Show preferred phone number   
					. 
					1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Contacts   
					111   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the   
					first phone number will be used.   
					4. Select Done.   
					To change the preferred phone number   
					1. Select a contact.   
					2. Select Edit > Edit contact   
					. 
					3. Select Edit > Show in list.   
					4. Select the number to be shown from the list.   
					5. Tap Done.   
					Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone   
					number is checked in preferences.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					112   
					Contacts   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Calendar   
					The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments   
					and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries.   
					Creating calendar entries   
					A reminder is denoted by a   
					. 
					To create a new calendar entry   
					1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the   
					Different views   
					entry. This is the description you see in the calendar.   
					You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the flip   
					open: Day, Week and Month. With the flip closed you will see   
					the Day view.   
					2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a   
					folder to store the entry in.   
					3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail   
					page.   
					To change view in flip open   
					– 
					Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or   
					all day event.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Tap   
					Tap   
					Tap   
					Tap   
					to display the Day view.   
					to display the Week view.   
					– 
					Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a   
					date for the entry.   
					to display the Month view.   
					to navigate to the present day in the displayed view.   
					– 
					– 
					Time - Set start and end time for the entry.   
					If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that   
					entry are shown.   
					Location - Specify a location or select a location you have   
					used before.   
					– 
					– 
					Alarm - Select the check box if you want your P910i to   
					alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and   
					date that appears for your settings.   
					To navigate backwards or forwards in the current view   
					Tap the left and right arrows in the button bar at the bottom of   
					the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial.   
					Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not.   
					Read more about this below.   
					To navigate to a specific date in the current view   
					Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to   
					show a calendar pop-up in which you can select a specific date.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Calendar   
					113   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					– 
					Private - Select the check box to prevent the item from   
					being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize   
					your calendar with, for example, your PC.   
					Managing calendar entries   
					To find a certain entry   
					4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.   
					5. Select to save and close the entry.   
					1. Select Calendar > Find   
					. 
					2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears.   
					3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past).   
					4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.   
					5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.   
					You should delete old entries regularly to release memory.   
					To create re-occurring entries   
					1. When the entry is open, select Repeat   
					. 
					– Set repeating to Daily Monthly by date, Monthly by   
					, 
					Weekly   
					, 
					To delete an entry   
					day   
					, 
					Yearly by date or Yearly by day.   
					Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry   
					. 
					– 
					– 
					Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for   
					example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the   
					event will go off every two weeks on the specified day.   
					A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete   
					. 
					To delete all entries in a period of time   
					Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select   
					forever.   
					1. Select Calendar > Remove entries   
					. 
					2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that   
					2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice   
					or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend   
					Tuesday and Friday every week.   
					time period are deleted from the Calendar.   
					Note Repeated entries will not be deleted.   
					Note You cannot repeat All Day Events   
					To copy, cut or paste an entry   
					1. Open the entry.   
					To edit an entry   
					2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry.   
					3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry.   
					4. Select Paste entry.   
					1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar.   
					2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					114   
					Calendar   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To move a Calendar item to Tasks   
					2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details.   
					1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks   
					. 
					To customize the alarm settings   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences.   
					2. Select the Alarm tab.   
					2. The entry is moved, not copied.   
					If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in   
					Tasks.   
					Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the   
					To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application   
					1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry.   
					2. Open Tasks.   
					length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off.   
					To assign colours to your entries using the folders   
					1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu   
					3. Select Edit > Paste entry.   
					bar and select Edit folders.   
					2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by   
					selecting Add   
					3. Select the colour box and select colour for that folder and   
					select Done   
					. 
					Sending and receiving calendar   
					entries   
					. 
					You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See   
					Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in   
					Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can   
					see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as   
					whatever the folder colour.   
					‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.   
					Preferences   
					You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit   
					your own needs.   
					Saving changes   
					If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will   
					be saved automatically.   
					To customize the calendar view, General tab   
					1. Select Edit > Preferences.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Calendar   
					115   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Lunar calendar   
					You can look up the Lunar Calendar correspondence for a   
					specified date ranging from January 1 1901 to December 31   
					2100, where the current day is highlighted in red and public   
					holidays are displayed in red fonts.   
					• 
					• 
					Jog Dial backwards - Hides the current process so that it   
					runs in the background.   
					When the Year / Month list appears, rotate Jog Dial up or   
					down and then Jog Dial inwards to select the desired year or   
					month.   
					To use the Lunar Calendar   
					• 
					Click the button in the left of the Month - Shows the   
					previous month within the current year; and displays   
					information for December of last year if it were January   
					currently.   
					• 
					Click the button in the right of the Month - Shows the next   
					month within the current year; and displays information for   
					January of the following year if it were December currently.   
					• 
					• 
					Click the Month - Displays the list of months.   
					Click the button in the left of the Year - Shows the   
					information for the current month of last year.   
					• 
					• 
					Click the button in the right of the Year - Shows the   
					information for the current month of next year.   
					Click the Year - Displays the list of years.   
					You can also use Jog Dial for some operations:   
					• 
					Jog Dial forwards - Displays the menu.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					116   
					Lunar calendar   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Tasks   
					With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need   
					to do. The folders help you to separate different types of   
					activities.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Completed – Select the check box when the task is   
					done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list.   
					Priority – Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks   
					by priority.   
					You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is   
					useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also   
					send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless   
					technology, multimedia message or email.   
					Due date – Select the check box to set a deadline for the   
					task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where   
					you can set a due date.   
					– 
					– 
					Alarm – Select the check box if you want your P910i to   
					alert you about the task. Select the time and date that   
					appears for your settings.   
					Creating task entries   
					Private – Select the check box to prevent the task from   
					being visible by others, when synchronized with shared   
					calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC.   
					The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task   
					to see its full information.   
					A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you   
					set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add   
					notes.   
					4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.   
					5. Select to save and close the task.   
					Note Delete will delete the whole task entry.   
					To create a new task entry   
					1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task.   
					To edit an entry   
					This is the description you see in the task list.   
					1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list.   
					2. Make the changes according to the instructions above.   
					2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a   
					folder to store the task in.   
					3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail   
					page.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Tasks   
					117   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To restore a deleted entry   
					Managing task entries   
					Select Edit > Undo delete.   
					To open an existing entry   
					Select the entry in the Tasks list.   
					To delete all completed entries   
					In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed   
					. 
					To mark an entry as completed   
					Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted   
					Select the check box to the left of the entry in the Tasks list.   
					permanently and cannot be restored.   
					To sort the entries   
					Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date   
					. 
					Moving task entries   
					To find a certain entry   
					To move an entry to the Calendar   
					Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is   
					moved, not copied.   
					1. Select Tasks > Find   
					. 
					2. Enter a search word.   
					3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value   
					To copy a task entry to Calendar   
					All folders   
					. 
					1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry   
					. 
					4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.   
					2. Open Calendar.   
					5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.   
					3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear.   
					4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar.   
					To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry   
					1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry.   
					2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry.   
					Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose   
					the priority it was assigned in Tasks.   
					To delete an entry   
					Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					118   
					Tasks   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					If you do not set a due date for the task entry, the current date   
					will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an   
					entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the   
					Calendar.   
					Sending and receiving task   
					entries   
					You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See   
					‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.   
					Preferences   
					Select Edit > Preferences to change the settings. The following   
					settings are available.   
					– 
					Display due dates – Select whether or not to display them in   
					the Tasks list.   
					– 
					Display completed – Select whether or not to display them   
					in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Tasks   
					119   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Jotter   
					The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and   
					draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of   
					notes.   
					To edit a note while working with it   
					• 
					For text, select Edit > Revert.   
					The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost.   
					A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one   
					drawing page. With the flip closed, you can read and edit your   
					notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures.   
					• 
					For sketches, select Edit > Undo.   
					This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your   
					mind, select Edit > Redo   
					. 
					When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes, with the   
					first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full   
					information or edit it.   
					To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another   
					application   
					Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste   
					. 
					Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing   
					sketch will be deleted.   
					Creating and editing notes   
					Create a note with the flip closed (text only)   
					To create a new note   
					1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.   
					1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New.   
					2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed.   
					Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.   
					The new note will automatically start as a text note. Select   
					a 
					to get bold text and   
					to create a bullet list.   
					a 
					3. Press   
					if you want to create a new note. Select New.   
					2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a   
					Insert your text by using the keypad.   
					folder to store the jotter in.   
					3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note.   
					Edit a note with the flip closed   
					4. Select   
					to save and close the note.   
					1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.   
					2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					120   
					Jotter   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					3. Press   
					. Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad.   
					Managing notes   
					To delete a note   
					Drawing pictures   
					1. Select the note in the notes list.   
					The note opens.   
					You can draw with different   
					nib widths and colours. The   
					2. Select Jotter > Delete note   
					. 
					main window is the ‘paper’   
					where you can draw with   
					your stylus in the same way   
					as you draw with an ordinary   
					pen.   
					Jotter Edit   
					Unfiled   
					Sending and receiving notes   
					You can send and receive notes using Send as. See ‘Sending and   
					receiving items’ on page 31.   
					Select   
					to change colour.   
					to change the   
					Note Selecting Send as SMS will send the text only.   
					Select   
					virtual nib.   
					Select   
					to activate the   
					eraser. Tap the eraser again to   
					re-activate the pen.   
					All jotter files (both text and   
					drawings) are automatically   
					stored in the P910i. The list   
					view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter   
					application.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Jotter   
					121   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					TOOLS   
					Sound recorder   
					In Sound recorder you can record and listen to your own sound   
					recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices   
					via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication,   
					email or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a   
					ring signal.   
					2. Select   
					3. Select   
					and start recording after the beep.   
					to finish the recording.   
					Key functions   
					Select... To...   
					Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded   
					and by its position in the list of sound recordings.   
					start recording a sound.   
					listen to the current sound recording.   
					stop the current sound recording.   
					Making sound recordings   
					go to the previous sound recording in the list.   
					go to the next sound recording in the list.   
					To record and save a sound recording   
					1. Select   
					> 
					> New.   
					A new sound recording is created.   
					To delete a sound recording   
					1. Select a sound recording you want to delete.   
					2. Select and start recording after the beep.   
					3. Select to finish the recording.   
					2. Select Delete recording > Yes   
					. 
					The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of   
					sound recordings with the current date and time.   
					Using sound recordings as ring   
					signals   
					To append to the end of a previous sound recording   
					You can set a sound recording as a ring signal.Your sound   
					recordings will appear in the list of sounds that can be selected   
					1. Select the required recording.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					122   
					Sound recorder   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					as ring signals. They will take the form voicenote and a number,   
					for example voicenote1470   
					. 
					To set a sound recording as a ring signal see ‘Sounds and alerts’   
					on page 157.   
					Sending sound recordings   
					You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless   
					technology, infrared communication, email or as a multimedia   
					message.   
					To send a sound recording   
					1. Select Sound recorder > Send as   
					. 
					2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See ‘To   
					send an item using Send as’ on page 31 for more   
					information.   
					Note All other sound media on your P910i is handled via the   
					Music player application. You can send sound items from   
					Music player and all received sound items are played using Music   
					player   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Sound recorder   
					123   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Calculator   
					The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add,   
					subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and   
					Key functions   
					mr   
					m+   
					m-   
					Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it   
					into the screen.   
					Tap twice to clear the memory.   
					percentages. It also has a memory function.   
					To use the calculator   
					Tap once to store an entered value in the memory.   
					If you have already entered a value in the memory, tap once   
					to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory.   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.   
					Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the   
					memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed.   
					All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed   
					in the order they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30.   
					Tap once to delete the last digit you entered.   
					Tap once to reset the screen to 0.   
					Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate,   
					for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed   
					when you tap the %-key.   
					C 
					You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by   
					selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste   
					. 
					Values stored in the memory are retained while using other   
					applications.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					124   
					Calculator   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Time   
					The time and date are always displayed on the flip closed   
					standby screen. You can customize the display of times and   
					dates throughout your P910i. You can set your current location   
					and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set   
					three different alarms.   
					Use the am/pm box to switch between am and pm. (This is   
					only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.) Confirm   
					by tapping outside the time picker.   
					6. Select Done   
					. 
					Format   
					Setting time and date   
					You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed   
					on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time   
					format.   
					To set the current time and date   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					To set the time and date display format   
					2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					current time and date settings.   
					2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the   
					3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year   
					and month. Then select the current day.   
					current time and date settings.   
					3. Select Format   
					. 
					4. Tap Summertime, then select the check box next to the zone   
					that currently has summer time and tap Done. This is only   
					required if you are currently in a country/region with summer   
					time.   
					4. Tap the Date Format box and choose a format.   
					5. Tap the Date Separator box and choose a separator.   
					6. Select a Time format   
					. 
					5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or   
					minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower   
					half to decrease the number.   
					7. Tap the Time separator box and choose a separator.   
					8. Select Done   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Time   
					125   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To set the locations   
					Specifying workdays   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want   
					to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also   
					specify the first day of your week to customize the display of   
					both Week and Month views in Calendar.   
					2. Tap Time > Set location   
					. 
					3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/   
					region you are in at that moment.   
					4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that   
					moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city   
					closest to you.   
					To specify your workdays   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the   
					5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/   
					region.   
					current time and date settings.   
					3. Select Workdays   
					. 
					6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city.   
					4. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work.   
					7. Tap Done   
					. 
					5. Select First day of week and choose a day.   
					6. Tap Done   
					. 
					Setting number formats   
					You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers   
					in your P910i to be displayed in all your applications. Distances   
					can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and   
					different punctuation marks can be used as separators.   
					Setting locations   
					Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The   
					city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time.   
					If you are away from home, for example travelling in another   
					country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your   
					home country/region as well as the country/region you are in.   
					The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the   
					clock in Time.   
					To set the number details   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					2. Select Time > Set location   
					. 
					3. Select Numbers   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					126   
					Time   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down   
					lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency   
					symbols.   
					2. Select one of the alarm slots.   
					3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go   
					off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.   
					5. Tap Done   
					. 
					4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go   
					off:   
					– 
					Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than   
					24 hours from now but within the next eight days.   
					Setting alarms   
					You can set up to three different alarms in your P910i. You can   
					choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm   
					with your own definitions.   
					– 
					– 
					– 
					– 
					Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours.   
					Daily Every day at the specified time.   
					Workdays Every workday at the specified time.   
					Weekly Every week at the specified time.   
					You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is   
					displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert.   
					
					Alarms requires that the P910i is turned on. If you want to get   
					alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not   
					allowed, you can set the P910i to flight mode, see ‘Flight mode’   
					on page 53.   
					6. Select Message and choose a preset message or write a new   
					one.   
					7. Tap Done   
					. 
					8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected.   
					Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P910i, the   
					alarm will only be heard in the headset.   
					When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for   
					five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off   
					the alarm completely, tap Done   
					. 
					To activate an existing alarm   
					• 
					Select the check box in the alarm slot.   
					status bar on the screen.   
					is displayed on the   
					To set a new alarm   
					1. Select   
					> 
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Time   
					127   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					
					With Quickword™ and Quicksheet™ you can view and edit   
					Common viewer and editor   
					Microsoft Word and Excel documents. With Pdf+ you can view   
					Adobe™ Acrobat™ (PDF) documents. Quickpoint™ is a   
					viewer for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations. Animations and   
					functions   
					embedded objects will be shown as plain text.   
					To open a document from an email or Internet page   
					Select the document link. The document viewer opens the   
					document in the detail view.   
					When the flip is open there are two views:   
					An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to   
					view.   
					List view   
					To open a document from the list view   
					1. Select the Application launcher icon   
					2. Select, for example, the Quickword icon   
					3. If required, change folder.   
					The contents of a file, for viewing and editing the   
					file.   
					Detail view   
					. 
					. 
					The applications are also started automatically when selecting   
					and opening attachments to messages.   
					4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name.   
					5. The document is shown in the detail view.   
					To save documents to another location (internal or on the   
					Memory Stick) you use folders, see ‘Folders’ on page 29.   
					The functions available differ depending on the document type.   
					Common functions are similar between the applications and are   
					described first.   
					Please read the help texts for detailed information about the   
					viewers and editors.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Viewers and editors – Quickoffice   
					128   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Quickword   
					Quicksheet   
					To save and copy the document to a special folder   
					To save and copy the document to a special folder   
					1. In the list view, scroll to the desired file and select Quickword   
					1. In the list view, scroll to the desired file and select Quicksheet   
					> Copy   
					. 
					> Copy.   
					2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy   
					. 
					2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy.   
					To edit a document   
					To edit a document   
					In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,   
					The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Excel   
					format) transferred to your P910i, you have to rename it. When   
					you select OK, your P910i copies the document with the new   
					name.   
					select the edit icon   
					. 
					The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Word   
					format) transferred to your P910i, you have to rename it. When   
					you select OK, your P910i copies the document with the new   
					name.   
					At the bottom of the screen you find the spreadsheet character   
					input field, and icons for performing the most common   
					spreadsheet functions.   
					In the toolbar you find icons for performing the most common   
					word-processing functions.   
					When you have edited the document and leave it, your P910i   
					saves it automatically.   
					When you have finished editing and leave the document, your   
					P910i saves it automatically.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Viewers and editors – Quickoffice   
					129   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Viewing a presentation   
					The presentation opens by default in Outline view where the   
					Quickpoint   
					outline of the whole presentation appears. You can shift to Notes   
					view where you can see the notes to each slide, or to Slide view   
					to show the slides.   
					To open a presentation from the list view   
					1. Select the Application launcher icon   
					2. Select the Quickpoint icon   
					. 
					Navigate through the presentation with the stylus and the Jog   
					Dial. Change the type of viewing from the toolbar at the bottom   
					of the screen. The commands are also available from the menus:   
					3. If required, change folder.   
					4. Scroll to the required file and select the file name.   
					5. The presentation is shown in the detail view.   
					Outline view. Show the slide headings and the sub texts.   
					Notes view. Show notes added to a slide.   
					Slide view. Show the presentation.   
					Switch between fullscreen view and normal view.   
					Show next slide.   
					To open a presentation from and email or Internet page   
					Select the document link. Quickpoint opens the presentation in   
					the detail view.   
					To handle a presentation file   
					1. Highlight the presentation file in list view.   
					2. Select the required command from the Quickpoint menu.   
					Show previous slide.   
					Expand the current slide (in Outline view).   
					Collapse the current slide (in Outline view).   
					Zoom in (in Slide view).   
					Zoom out (in Slide view).   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Viewers and editors – Quickoffice   
					130   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Wraps the document, that is the text is displayed in a format   
					which fits the screen. Images and line drawings are not visible   
					in this view.   
					Pdf+   
					To save and copy a received document   
					Unwraps the document.   
					1. In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the   
					Search.   
					screen, select the save icon   
					. 
					2. Name the document, select where to save it, and select Save   
					. 
					Search for links.   
					To move a document   
					In the detail view, from the folder menu, select a new folder.   
					To view a document   
					Control the viewing from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen:   
					Bookmarks view. Select a heading to go to the corresponding   
					page. You can also use the Jog Dial to select a bookmark, and   
					then use the icon below to go to the corresponding page.   
					Takes you to the selected page.   
					Returns you to the page view.   
					Previous page.   
					Next page.   
					Full screen.   
					To return to the normal view, select the icon and de-select   
					Full screen.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Viewers and editors – Quickoffice   
					131   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					File manager   
					With the File Manager you can view, rename, copy, move, and   
					delete files on the P910i. You can also add folders, send files   
					and rename and format the Memory Stick.   
					To move within the folder structure   
					• 
					• 
					To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder.   
					To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the folder.   
					Folders are opened in the file manager while other files are   
					opened in the applicable application.   
					Initially, the root view is shown, with the sub folders:   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Audio, where all audio files are stored.   
					Document, where different document files are stored.   
					To add a folder   
					Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are   
					1. Select File > New folder   
					. 
					stored.   
					2. Type a folder name and tap Done   
					. 
					• 
					• 
					Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are   
					stored.   
					To copy or move one or more files   
					Video, where all video clips are stored.   
					1. Select the files to handle.   
					Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal   
					storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick. The   
					path to the selected folder is shown at the top of the window.   
					2. Select the required activity from the File menu.   
					3. Select the destination and tap Done   
					. 
					Note There is an important distinction between External-media   
					To delete one or more folders or files   
					and External-other External-other lets you view folders that have   
					. 
					Note Only empty folders can be deleted.   
					been placed on the Memory Stick by other equipment, such as   
					digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can   
					be viewed.   
					1. Select the folders or files to delete.   
					2. Select File > Delete   
					. 
					From the file manager it is possible to reach the Control Panel   
					storage manager, see ‘Storage manager’ on page 177. You can   
					also format the Memory Stick, see ‘Formatting a Memory Stick’   
					on page 23.   
					3. Tap Delete   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					132   
					File manager   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To change properties for one or more folders or files   
					1. Select the folders or files to change.   
					2. Select File > Properties   
					. 
					3. Change the properties, as required.   
					4. Tap Done   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					File manager   
					133   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Online services   
					Online services is a customized service offered by a network   
					i 
					operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent.   
					Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications   
					that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P910i. It   
					may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the   
					latest information from the stock market.   
					Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator.   
					Note Contact your operator to find out which services are   
					available for your account.   
					Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online   
					services application will appear in the application list under a   
					name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to   
					represent the Online services application   
					will not change.   
					i 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					134   
					Online services   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Dictionary   
					The dictionary application contains both English - Chinese and   
					Chinese - English dictionaries.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Chinese meaning (English - Chinese dictionary only).   
					Synonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).   
					Antonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).   
					The dictionary operates in flip open mode only. Closing the flip   
					will shut the dictionary down.   
					English usage examples and its Chinese meaning (optional,   
					English - Chinese dictionary only).   
					Views   
					There are three views in Dictionary:   
					• 
					General View – where the user inputs a word and is given a   
					brief explanation. Depending on the settings, the information   
					is displayed horizontally or vertically.   
					Searching for a word   
					To look up a word in the dictionary   
					• 
					• 
					Detail View – where the detailed explanation of a selected   
					entry is displayed.   
					1. Select the dictionary icon   
					The dictionary opens.   
					. 
					Bookmark view – where the words you have saved are   
					displayed. Depending on the settings, the information is   
					displayed horizontally or vertically.   
					2. Enter a word in the input box.   
					– When entering an English word, the word can be entered   
					letter by letter. The English index is shown. The index   
					changes when the input changes.   
					The explanation content includes:   
					– When entering a Chinese word, the Chinese index is   
					shown.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Headword.   
					Phonetic symbol.   
					– The general index shows the next closest entry to the   
					entered word.   
					Part of speech (for example verb, noun, English - Chinese   
					dictionary only).   
					3. Select an entry in the index.   
					• 
					Grammatical variation (optional, English - Chinese   
					dictionary only).   
					The brief explanation of the word is displayed.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Dictionary   
					135   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					4. To view the detailed description of the word, select the detail   
					view button   
					1. Enter a word where one or more letters are substituted for   
					wildcard characters. The question mark (?) represents any   
					one character, and the asterisk (*) represents any number of   
					characters.   
					. 
					5. To view the detailed description of an underlined word in the   
					description, select the word.   
					2. Select the search button   
					. 
					6. To go back and forward between the detailed views, select   
					the navigation buttons   
					. 
					To look up bookmarked words   
					To look up previously entered words   
					• 
					Select the bookmark view button   
					. 
					1. Select the drop-down box at the input box.   
					2. A history list of previously entered words is displayed.   
					3. Select one of the words in the list.   
					History record and bookmarks   
					To clear the history list   
					To use fuzzy search   
					Normal search returns the words in the list that are   
					alphabetically closest to the input word. Fuzzy search returns   
					the words whose spelling is closest to the input word.   
					• 
					Select Edit > Clear history.   
					To add a word to the bookmark list   
					Note Fuzzy search can only be used when searching the   
					1. Look up a word, following the instructions given above.   
					dictionary with English words.   
					2. Select the add to bookmark button   
					. 
					1. Perform a normal search.   
					To delete Bookmarks   
					2. Select the search button   
					. 
					1. Select the bookmarks to delete, by clicking to the right of the   
					bookmark. If all bookmarks are to be deleted, select Edit >   
					Select all.   
					To use wildcards   
					Note Wildcards can only be used when searching the dictionary   
					with English words.   
					2. Select Dictionary > Delete bookmark   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					136   
					Dictionary   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					4. Select the number of words in the history drop-down list.   
					Dictionary database   
					5. Select Done   
					. 
					You can use four databases:   
					To move the line between the index and description   
					1. Press and hold the stylus on the line.   
					2. Move the line as required.   
					• 
					• 
					One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English   
					database in the telephone.   
					One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English   
					database in the external storage.   
					To update a database   
					• 
					You update the database from the PC using the PC software.   
					After the update, information on the database is displayed.   
					To delete a database   
					1. Select Edit > Delete database   
					. 
					2. Select the database to delete.   
					3. Select Delete.   
					Settings   
					To set-up Dictionary   
					1. Select Edit >Preferences   
					. 
					2. Select if you want the general and bookmark views tiled   
					horizontally or vertically.   
					3. Select the desired sort order for the bookmarks.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Dictionary   
					137   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					ADVANCED FUNCTIONS   
					PC Suite and Content and Application   
					Installation of the Sony Ericsson PC Suite   
					The Sony Ericsson PC Suite programs can be used with Windows   
					ME, 98, 2000 and XP.   
					Sony Ericsson PC Suite   
					The Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD delivered with your P910i   
					contains a set of useful applications:   
					When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically   
					shown. Select language and then start the Sony Ericsson PC Suite   
					Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.   
					• 
					Synchronization – Synchronization of Calendar, Notes,   
					Contacts and Tasks against Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes   
					and Lotus Organizer.   
					• 
					• 
					Backup and Restore – Make safety copies of your data via   
					SyncStation.   
					If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run   
					command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your   
					CD drive.   
					File Manager – Transfer files (images, documents, music) via   
					Windows® Explorer between your P910i and PC.   
					By default the Sony Ericsson PC Suite is accessed from Start menu   
					• 
					• 
					Install software – Install applications in the P910i.   
					> Programs > Sony Ericsson > P910i.   
					Dial-Up Networking Wizard – Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD   
					settings for using your P910i as a modem.   
					The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete   
					components.   
					• 
					Drivers – Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected   
					SyncStation.   
					You can download the latest PC Suite software from   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support   
					Refer to the online help for each specific application.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					PC Suite and Content and Application   
					138   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Content and Application   
					The Content and Application CD contains a number of applications   
					and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P910i and   
					used together with its applications.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Games.   
					Audio files.   
					Pictures.   
					Video clips.   
					MMS templates.   
					MMS editor.   
					Image editor.   
					Opening the Content and Application CD   
					When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens   
					automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the   
					instructions on the PC screen.   
					If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run   
					command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from   
					your CD drive.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					PC Suite and Content and Application   
					139   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Installing applications   
					It is possible to install new applications in your P910i. These   
					applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:   
					guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them   
					at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not   
					approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your   
					warranty.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					from the Internet.   
					from a CD.   
					from a Memory Stick.   
					as an email attachment.   
					Installing applications on your   
					P910i   
					There are two types of installation files for applications:   
					• 
					SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P910i or other   
					Sony Ericsson devices.   
					Installation file security   
					Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation   
					of Epoc or PersonalJava™ applications or other content into the   
					P910i file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides   
					where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will   
					be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that   
					the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you are certain   
					of the origin of the SIS file you can take an installation decision   
					based on what you know about that vendor. Your P910i supports   
					cryptographic verification of vendor identity.   
					• 
					MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java   
					Archive).   
					Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one   
					or more files.   
					Programs made for the Sony Ericsson P800 and P900 series can   
					also be used in the P910i.   
					This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for   
					example, system components and add-ons.   
					During installation the P910i verifies a digital signature and   
					certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone.   
					Successful verification means that you can trust the origin of the   
					SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was   
					Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called   
					third-party developers, might be possible to install in the P910i.   
					Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					140   
					Installing applications   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature you   
					will be given a warning about the problem but you can still   
					decide to proceed with the installation at your own risk. In   
					general, it is recommended that you install only from SIS files   
					where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified.   
					Download to the P910i begins.   
					5. Installation starts when the download is complete.   
					From the P910i   
					Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded   
					to your P910i from the Internet or from a Memory Stick. When   
					downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start   
					automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your   
					P910i. The procedure below describes installation of application   
					packages transferred to the P910i but not yet installed.   
					Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your   
					system to crash and all your data will then be lost.   
					MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no   
					access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for   
					MIDP JAR files.   
					See ‘To download and upload files, for example, applications’   
					on page 84 for information about how to download files from   
					the Internet.   
					From a PC   
					Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and the P910i   
					must be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or   
					Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications   
					from your PC.   
					Installing applications in the P910i   
					1. Select   
					. 
					2. From the menu, select Applications > Install   
					. 
					Installing applications from your PC   
					3. Select the software from the list.   
					1. Connect your P910i to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or   
					Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is   
					shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC.   
					4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information   
					dialog will be shown with the name of the software, version   
					and supplier. Select Install again.   
					2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the   
					application (.sis file) to install. You can also open a .sis file   
					directly in your PC.   
					5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to   
					replace a previous installation, select language, memory   
					location and select other installation options.   
					3. Confirm to install the application in the P910i.   
					4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick).   
					6. Installation is complete.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Installing applications   
					141   
				deskstand and an Internet-connected PC (preferably via   
					broadband).   
					Removing applications from   
					your P910i   
					To update the P910i software   
					It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and   
					1. Connect the desk stand to your PC and place your P910i into   
					user data to free up memory.   
					it.   
					Removing applications in the P910i   
					1. Select   
					2. Visit Sony Ericsson P910i support site on   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support   
					. 
					3. Select Sony Ericsson Update Service and follow the   
					instructions on how to proceed with the update sequence.   
					2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall   
					. 
					3. Select the application to be uninstalled.   
					Answer Yes when you are asked if you want to install the Sony   
					Ericsson Update Service PC program.   
					4. Select Uninstall   
					5. Tap Yes to confirm.   
					6. Select Done   
					. 
					Note User data can be lost when the software is updated.   
					Always back up the phone before updating.   
					. 
					Tip See also ‘Master reset’ on page 176 and ‘Storage manager’   
					on page 177 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal   
					of applications and user data.   
					Some removed applications can be reinstalled from the PC Suite   
					for the P910i and the Content and Application CD.   
					Sony Ericsson Update Service   
					With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone   
					updated with the latest P910i software. When a new software   
					version is available, you can download and install it using the   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					142   
					Installing applications   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Connecting to other devices   
					Your P910i can be connected to other devices with similar   
					interfaces such as PCs, other P910is and handheld computers.   
					PC connectivity software   
					Your P910i is delivered with a CD, Sony Ericsson PC Suite. This   
					software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See   
					‘Installing applications’ on page 140 for more information. You   
					do not need to install the Sony Ericsson PC Suite if you only want   
					to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset.   
					The connection can be made via:   
					• 
					Bluetooth wireless technology (not together with   
					Windows 98)   
					• 
					• 
					Cable   
					Infrared (IrDA)   
					Connection via SyncStation   
					Note Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared transmitting   
					are rather power consuming. Do not have them on more than   
					necessary.   
					Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A   
					wizard helps you to install the USB cable the first time. The   
					Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD contains the necessary software.   
					Depending on the type of connection you have chosen, you can   
					use your P910i to perform various tasks, for example:   
					Put your P910i in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts which   
					helps you to connect your P910i if this is the first time.   
					appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when   
					the P910i is connected.   
					• 
					Sending and receiving files via infrared or Bluetooth wireless   
					technology – ‘beaming’.   
					• 
					Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data   
					and file transfer (cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless   
					technology).   
					When connecting via cable, the P910i can be set in PC Connect   
					mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >   
					Connections > Cable, see ‘Cable’ on page 162.   
					You can even use your P910i as a modem for Dial-Up   
					Networking using cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless   
					technology. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can for   
					example, connect a cordless headset.   
					Set the P910i in PC connect mode for   
					• 
					• 
					Synchronization.   
					Installation of software.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Connecting to other devices   
					143   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Backup and restore.   
					To activate the infrared port on the PC   
					1. Right click   
					in the status area to the right on the taskbar.   
					Set the P910i in Modem mode when using   
					2. Select Properties   
					• 
					• 
					P910i as a modem.   
					3. Select the Infrared check box   
					Dial-up network wizard.   
					4. Click Close   
					. 
					You should disable the USB cable connection in these two   
					cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone   
					Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to   
					which the cable is connected.   
					Note Clear the Infrared check box when ready.   
					Send and receive   
					You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any   
					application if there is a Send as command. To send, select   
					Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialog box appears with   
					Connection via Infrared port   
					three options: Delete   
					opens the associated application which shows the item; Done   
					saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages   
					, 
					View or Done. Delete deletes the item; View   
					When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both   
					devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the   
					infrared ports have a free line of sight between them.   
					. 
					Both your P910i and the device you connect to must have their   
					infrared ports activated before communication can begin.   
					Connection via Bluetooth   
					wireless technology   
					To activate the infrared port on the P910i   
					1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared   
					. 
					You can connect your P910i to other products equipped with   
					Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs, car handsfree   
					devices, or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since   
					Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, there does not   
					have to be a free line of sight between transmitting and receiving   
					devices. This means that your P910i can stay in your pocket   
					2. Set the P910i to PC connect or Modem as required.   
					3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes.   
					You can also change the infrared port state with the flip closed,   
					in the Connections application.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					144   
					Connecting to other devices   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					while communicating. However, items between transmitting and   
					receiving devices might weaken the signal.   
					Pairing   
					To let your P910i initiate pairing with another device, such as   
					Connection to another device can be made within a range of up   
					a headset   
					to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will   
					have an effect on the performance. For all tasks, except   
					beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and   
					1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Bluetooth   
					to On. Make sure Visible to other devices is selected.   
					trusted relationship between your P910i and the other device.   
					This process is called pairing (other documentation may refer to   
					it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your   
					P910i even after you have turned it off so you do not need to   
					repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The   
					reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make   
					them secure – only paired devices can connect to your P910i.   
					2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable.   
					3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P910i searches for all   
					devices in the vicinity and lists them.   
					
					are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to   
					restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example).   
					– Paired devices that are within range are shown with   
					regular text.   
					Activating Bluetooth wireless technology   
					– Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with   
					Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P910i in Control   
					panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Bluetooth to On, and   
					set if your P910i should be Visible to other devices or not. See   
					‘Bluetooth’ on page 161 for more information on Bluetooth   
					wireless technology settings.   
					their names in italics.   
					– Devices that are within range but unknown are shown   
					with a preset name.   
					4. Select the device you want your P910i to pair with, and enter   
					a passcode when asked for it. When the passcode is accepted,   
					the pairing process is complete, see ‘Passcodes’ on page 146.   
					The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be   
					changed with the flip closed, through the Connections   
					application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is   
					5. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect   
					to your P910i without you explicitly approving each   
					connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >   
					Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box   
					activated,   
					appears on the screen and the left indicator light   
					on top of your P910i flashes blue.   
					Allow to connect without confirmation   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Connecting to other devices   
					145   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To let another device initiate pairing with your P910i   
					4. In the Devices tab tap Add. Your P910i searches for all devices   
					in the vicinity and lists them.   
					1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set   
					Bluetooth to On   
					. 
					5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphone’s passcode   
					on your P910i.   
					2. Follow the other device’s manual to initiate pairing.   
					6. If in the future you want to allow the headphone to connect to   
					your P910i without you explicitly approving each   
					3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices.   
					4. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect   
					to your P910i without you explicitly approving each   
					connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >   
					Bluetooth > Devices, select the headphone and the check box   
					connection you should select Control panel > Connections >   
					Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the check box Allow to   
					Allow to connect without confirmation   
					. 
					connect without confirmation   
					. 
					To remove a paired device from your P910i   
					Select a device in the list and select Remove   
					. 
					Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair   
					with other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled phones, it is   
					very useful to include the user's name as part of the device   
					name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the   
					desired recipients.   
					Passcodes   
					Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the   
					device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or   
					letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with   
					the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the   
					other user and each enter the same code into both devices when   
					asked for it. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is   
					that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets   
					often have a default passcode, usually ‘0000’, see the specific   
					user guide.   
					To let a headphone initiate pairing with your P910i   
					1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P910i:   
					– Is on and within range.   
					– Has its Bluetooth function activated and that it is in   
					visible mode.   
					2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set   
					Bluetooth to On   
					. 
					3. Follow the headphone’s manual to initiate pairing on the   
					headphone.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					146   
					Connecting to other devices   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Send and receive   
					You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any   
					application if there is a Send as command. To send, select   
					Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless   
					technology, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or   
					Reject the transfer. If Accept is selected, a dialog box appears   
					with three options: Delete   
					, 
					View or Done. Delete deletes the item;   
					View opens the associated application which shows the item;   
					Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages   
					. 
					Bluetooth share   
					You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from   
					your P910i. To make an item accessible, select Send as >   
					Bluetooth Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder,   
					accessible by other users. When a user requests to access your   
					Shared folder, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or   
					Reject the transfer.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Connecting to other devices   
					147   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Synchronization and backup   
					With Sony Ericsson PC Suite installed in your PC, your P910i can   
					synchronize with the following PC applications, also called   
					Local synchronization   
					Personal Information Managers (PIMs):   
					Bluetooth   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Lotus® Organizer® 5 & 6, 6.5   
					Lotus Notes® 5.0, 6   
					Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002, 2003   
					Microsoft Windows Address Book   
					Irda   
					Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local   
					synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while   
					remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server   
					in, for example, a corporate network.   
					Cable   
					Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or   
					Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same.   
					The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks but   
					you can also carry out most of them by selecting Start > Programs   
					> Sony Ericsson > P910i in the PC and then select the desired   
					command.   
					Email, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text)   
					can be synchronized locally.   
					Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC   
					software to get more information about synchronization and   
					backup.   
					Local synchronization settings   
					Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings   
					are made in the P910i PC software (included on the Sony   
					Ericsson PC Suite CD).   
					Note If you have imported SIM phone book entries into Contacts   
					in your P910i, these entries will not be synchronized with the   
					corresponding entries in your PC when synchronizing your   
					P910i and PC. You will instead get duplicates in your P910i.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					148   
					Synchronization and backup   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to   
					automatically make a synchronization every time your P910i is   
					connected.   
					2. In the PC, click on   
					on the PC taskbar and select   
					Synchronise   
					. 
					The synchronization starts.   
					3. After a short time, the PC application you want to   
					synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910i access to   
					it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.   
					To make the synchronization settings   
					In the PC, click on   
					in the status area to the right in the   
					taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings   
					. 
					A dialog appears where you can make the synchronization   
					settings. Click Help in the dialog to get more information about   
					the settings.   
					Remote synchronization   
					Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal   
					way to keep the P910i up-to-date while on the move. Using   
					GPRS, the P910i can be continuously connected to the remote   
					synchronization server.   
					Making a local synchronization   
					To make an automatic synchronization   
					1. Connect your P910i via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth   
					wireless technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting   
					to other devices’ on page 143.   
					GPRS, HSCSD   
					or CSD   
					2. Synchronization starts automatically.   
					3. After a short time, the PC application you want to   
					synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910i access to   
					it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.   
					PIM Application   
					Sync Server   
					Firewall   
					To make a manual synchronization   
					1. Connect your P910i via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless   
					technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting to other   
					devices’ on page 143.   
					Internet/Intranet   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Synchronization and backup   
					149   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators,   
					third-party service providers and as added capability to   
					corporate PIM applications.   
					3. Fill in the Task name or leave default.   
					4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate   
					information services help desk or your service provider).   
					Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely.   
					5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the   
					divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.)   
					6. Repeat for other items.   
					Remote synchronization settings   
					To configure the remote synchronization server   
					Making a remote synchronization   
					In Applications, select   
					Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill   
					Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button.   
					in the following parameters:   
					When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all   
					successfully synchronized items.   
					– Server address   
					– Username   
					– Password   
					
					You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login   
					under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information   
					services help desk or your service provider for information on   
					these parameters.   
					You can use the P910i Backup and Restore PC software to back up   
					the contents stored in your P910i to your computer. Keeping   
					backups of your P910i contents on your computer means that   
					you have a separate copy of the contents of the P910i, which can   
					be restored into the P910i. Backups should be made on a regular   
					basis. See the online help for P910i Backup and Restore for more   
					information on how to use the application.   
					You also need to have at least one configured Internet account   
					that remote sync can use to connect, see ‘Internet accounts’ on   
					page 163.   
					To select items to synchronize   
					Note All user data will be deleted when the P910i software is   
					upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before   
					handing over the P910i for upgrading, so that you can restore it   
					afterwards   
					1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be   
					synchronized.   
					2. Select the Enable task check box.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					150   
					Synchronization and backup   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory   
					Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick.   
					Preconditions   
					The Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in the PC and the   
					P910i must be connected to the PC via cable.   
					To restore a backup   
					Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or   
					1. Turn on your P910i and connect it to the PC via cable.   
					Bluetooth wireless technology.   
					2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up   
					and restore   
					. 
					Performing a backup   
					3. Select your P910i in the menu that appears. Several P910is   
					can be backed up to the same PC.   
					To make a backup   
					4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved   
					1. Turn on your P910i and connect it to the PC via cable.   
					backups and click Restore   
					. 
					2. In the PC, click on   
					on the PC taskbar and select Back up   
					5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the   
					and restore   
					. 
					P910i.   
					3. Select your P910i in the menu that appears. Several P910is   
					can be backed up to the same PC.   
					6. The restore is complete.   
					4. Select Backup and choose what to back up: P910i and/or   
					Note Everything in your P910i will be overwritten by the   
					chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore,   
					you cannot cancel the procedure.   
					Memory Stick.   
					5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the   
					P910i.   
					Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files)   
					since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you   
					restore another P910i, you must reconfigure your Secure   
					Tokens. For more information see ‘Secure tokens’ on page 176.   
					6. The backup is complete.   
					Restoring data   
					Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P910i can   
					be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Synchronization and backup   
					151   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					SETTINGS   
					Personalizing your P910i   
					There are a number of ways you can give your P910i a personal   
					Setting a background picture   
					touch and change its settings to suit your requirements.   
					You can change the background image for the standby screen in   
					Control panel > Device > Display. You can use any image stored   
					internally or on a Memory Stick.   
					Themes   
					Tip More background images can be found on the Content and   
					Application CD, delivered with your P910i.   
					Themes control the colour of screen and text, the icons, and the   
					background picture. Sound themes control the notification   
					alerts. Five themes are pre-loaded in the P910i. Extra themes   
					can be found on the Content and Application CD where you also   
					can use the themes editor to modify the themes or create new.   
					
					downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or   
					transferring them using a cable from your PC.   
					To change the theme, select   
					see ‘Themes’ on page 159   
					Control panel > Device > Themes,   
					Background pictures should be 208 x 208 pixels and the picture   
					can be seen in the standby screen. (Any chosen picture will be   
					scaled to fit the screen). The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP,   
					WBMP, MBM or PNG format.   
					. 
					Changing your application   
					shortcuts   
					Setting the light intensity   
					You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications,   
					shown in the standby screen when the flip is closed, and the five   
					first shortcuts in the Application picker area in flip open (not the   
					You can set the maximum and minimum display light intensity.   
					This is useful to save the battery or protect your night sight   
					when driving a car. See “Power tab” on page 156.   
					Application launcher   
					be hidden, if you wish.   
					). The flip closed shortcuts can even   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					152   
					Personalizing your P910i   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity)   
					Setting a screen saver   
					service, your P910i can display the contact’s picture together   
					You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period   
					with the other information when an incoming call is received   
					of inactivity. See ‘Display’ on page 155. Keylock and device   
					with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be   
					lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When   
					displayed). The contact’s picture is also displayed when you   
					
					make a call to that person.   
					activate keys and/or enter the device lock code.   
					To choose the contact’s picture size   
					The images can be JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP,   
					WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Image format for the screen   
					saver should be 208 x 320 pixels.   
					1. Select   
					Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture.   
					
					box.   
					Note Using animated GIF uses more power.   
					3. Tap Done   
					. 
					Adding images to your   
					Contacts   
					Ring signals   
					Your P910i can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring   
					signals in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file   
					formats. When you choose a ring signal, your P910i will scan   
					the internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a   
					list of ring signals that are in these formats. Recordings you   
					have made using Sound Recorder can also be selected.   
					You can store a picture with   
					each entry in Contacts. See   
					11:03   
					‘Creating and editing   
					J 
					ohn   
					S 
					4613244500   
					mith   
					contacts’ on page 108.   
					+ 
					(h)   
					Pictures are easily taken   
					using the CommuniCorder   
					(see ‘CommuniCorder’ on   
					page 64) though of course   
					other images can be used.   
					Ring signals can be added by downloading from the Internet,   
					beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file   
					transfer from a PC and by using a Memory Stick. Extra ring   
					signals can be found on the Content and Application CD. You   
					can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to   
					available storage space.   
					E 
					nd call   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Personalizing your P910i   
					153   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a   
					Tasks   
					Set a sound for reminder alarms. See ‘Sounds and   
					number, for example voicenote1470.   
					alerts’ on page 157.   
					Messages   
					Set a different sound for each type of message as   
					notification of a new message:   
					See ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 157.   
					A ring signal may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that   
					
					‘To personalize the ring melody for a contact’ on page 109.   
					Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Calling Line   
					
					You may change the default ring signal that is played in all other   
					cases. To do this, see ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 157.   
					Note If your P910i finds that you have renamed, moved or   
					deleted a ring signal, it will play the default instead.   
					Alarm tones and sound   
					notification   
					You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in   
					these applications:   
					Time   
					See ‘Setting alarms’ on page 127.   
					Calendar   
					Set a sound for reminder alerts, see ‘Sounds and   
					alerts’ on page 157).   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					154   
					Personalizing your P910i   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Control panel   
					The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on   
					your P910i that are system-wide and affect more than one   
					application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your   
					P910i, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access   
					and ‘Navigation’ on page 17. You can change the five shortcuts   
					shown. If you feel that the flip closed shortcuts obscure your   
					background, you can choose to have them hidden when you do   
					not need them.   
					it, select   
					Applications >   
					Control panel.   
					To change an application shortcut   
					Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in   
					the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit   
					> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences,   
					Internet > Edit > Preferences.   
					1. In the Application shortcuts dialog, select the Flip open or Flip   
					closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change.   
					2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the   
					application is shown in the Set application pick list.   
					The sections below describe the settings available for each of   
					the default items in the Control panel.   
					3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the   
					list.   
					To hide the flip closed application shortcuts when your P910i   
					is inactive   
					Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box.   
					The Device tab   
					The device tab contains settings related to the behaviour of your   
					P910i device itself.   
					Display   
					Use the Display settings to control the screen and power   
					functions of your P910i.   
					Application shortcuts   
					Use this dialog to configure the application shortcuts shown in   
					the flip closed standby view, and the Application picker   
					shortcuts in the flip open mode. See ‘Standby view’ on page 15   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					155   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					screen ensures that the correct item is activated. Tap Calibrate   
					screen and follow the instructions.   
					Background tab   
					You can set a picture to be the background for the standby   
					screen.   
					Power tab   
					1. Select if the flip closed or flip open background should be   
					You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank   
					changed.   
					the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the   
					power save time between 1 and 30 minutes.   
					2. Tap the image showing the current picture.   
					3. Browse to see picture files available on your P910i.   
					If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the   
					4. Select a picture and tap Select   
					. 
					power saver time will commence after the screen saver is   
					displayed.   
					Read more about background in ‘Personalizing your P910i’ on   
					page 152.   
					You can set the screen light settings for handheld use and car   
					use.   
					Screen tab   
					You can set a picture to be the screen saver.   
					Auto   
					Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or   
					receive an incoming call   
					On   
					Off   
					Light is always on   
					Light is always off   
					1. Select a picture for the screen saver.   
					2. Set the activation time for the screen saver.   
					If you select the Screen saver device lock check box the device   
					lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the   
					device lock in ‘Device lock’ on page 43.   
					Select Adjust brightness to set to set the normal (max) and   
					dimmed (min) light intensity for handheld use and car use. The   
					Brightness box works as a slider.   
					If you set a time for the Automatic input lock, the keyboard lock   
					will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the   
					automatic keylock in ‘Automatic keylock’ on page 44.   
					Occasionally you may find that you tap one item (for example a   
					button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					156   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					On the Location tab   
					Flight mode   
					• 
					Set Current country/region and Current city to your current   
					In flight mode the radio function is turned off. You cannot make   
					and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P910i are   
					available.   
					location.   
					• 
					Set Other country/region and Other city to an alternative   
					location (for example your home location if you are abroad).   
					Use these settings to turn the flight mode on or off and also to   
					activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will   
					ask you if you want to start the P910i in normal mode or flight   
					mode each time you turn on the P910i. Also, when you press the   
					On/Off button when your P910i is on, the Power menu will ask   
					you if you want to turn off the P910i, or switch to another mode.   
					If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the   
					desired time zone.   
					On the Numbers tab   
					Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire.   
					To activate the Power menu   
					Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done   
					. 
					Locks   
					Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device,   
					the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the   
					lock codes, see ‘P910i locks’ on page 42.   
					To cancel the selection of Power menu   
					Clear the Prompt me... check box and tap Done   
					. 
					International   
					Sounds and alerts   
					Use these settings to set the locations shown in   
					Time, as well   
					Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P910i.   
					as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how   
					currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Location   
					and Numbers.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Calls tab – Sets ring tones and volume.   
					Messages tab – Sets notification alerts for messages.   
					Other tab – Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,   
					and other notifications.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					157   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can   
					Calls tab   
					select ring signals that are stored on your local storage or on a   
					These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information see   
					Memory Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the   
					‘Ring signals’ on page 153.   
					Default Melody will be played instead.   
					You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual   
					contacts, see ‘To change the details of a contact’ on page 110.   
					To listen to the selected ringtone or alert   
					1. Tap the icon to listen to the signal.   
					• 
					• 
					Ring (voice) – Select a ring signal for incoming voice calls.   
					2. Tap again to stop playback.   
					Ring (voice) line 2 – Select a ring signal for incoming voice   
					calls.   
					To change the default ring tone or alert   
					• 
					• 
					Ring (data) – Select a ring signal for incoming data calls.   
					1. Tap the drop-down menu.   
					2. Select Default Melody for the P910i default or Find sound to   
					Ring volume – Set the preferred sound level for handheld,   
					handsfree and car use.   
					select a new one.   
					3. If required, change folder.   
					4. Select the required sound   
					• 
					Increasing ring – Select the checkbox to use increasing ring   
					signals. This disables the other volume settings.   
					5. Tap   
					and   
					to preview the sound.   
					Messages tab   
					6. Tap Select to set this sound.   
					These settings set messaging alerts.   
					Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the   
					higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure   
					to excessive volume may damage hearing.   
					• 
					Display notification message – Select the check box to receive   
					notification of a received message.   
					Note To set vibrating alert, silent mode, speakerphone or mute   
					the microphone, tap the volume icon on the status bar.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					SMS – Select an alert for received SMS messages.   
					Email – Select an alert for received Email messages.   
					MMS – Select an alert for received MMS messages.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					158   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					• 
					Area info – Select an alert for received area information   
					messages.   
					Use the settings on the Primary   
					set methods for entering text in your P910i.   
					, 
					Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to   
					Auto setup – Select an alert for auto setup messages.   
					Primary   
					The method that you select here is activated   
					automatically when you need to enter text into your   
					P910i.   
					Other tab   
					Alternative   
					Flip closed   
					
					These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,   
					and other notifications.   
					tap   
					at the bottom of the screen.   
					The method that you select here is activated when you   
					need to enter text with the flip closed.   
					• 
					Button click – Select the sound used when you press a key on   
					the keypad.   
					If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its   
					settings here.   
					• 
					• 
					Screen tap – Select the sound used when you tap the screen.   
					Key press – Select the sound used when you press a key on   
					the keyboard on the flips inside.   
					Themes   
					• 
					• 
					Reminder – Select an alert to be played for reminders.   
					You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme.   
					Voice messages – Select an alert to be played for voice   
					messages.   
					• 
					• 
					To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture   
					shows the flip closed standby background. Tap Select   
					. 
					• 
					Default alarm – Select the default alarm sound.   
					To listen to a theme sound, select the event from the drop-   
					down list. Tap the icon to play. Tap again to stop playback.   
					Text input   
					• 
					• 
					To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as   
					. 
					There are several standard ways of entering text in your P910i.   
					See ‘Entering text with the Flip closed’ on page 32 and   
					‘Entering text with the Flip open’ on page 35.   
					To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					159   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					2. Select the am/pm box.   
					Time & date   
					This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.   
					Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your   
					P910i.   
					3. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.   
					If the locations you have set under   
					Control panel >   
					The dialog has three tabs. You can set:   
					International are in a country/region that currently has   
					summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and   
					date.   
					Time & date   
					The current time and date. Here you can also turn   
					Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your   
					location.   
					Format   
					Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed   
					on the screen.   
					To turn daylight saving time on   
					1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the check   
					Workdays   
					Specify the days in your working week.   
					boxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time.   
					2. Select Done   
					. 
					Note These settings are also available in the   
					Time   
					application.   
					Format tab   
					Time & date tab   
					You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed   
					on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-   
					hour time format.   
					To set the current date   
					1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens.   
					To set the time and date display format   
					1. Select Date format and choose a format.   
					2. Select Date separator and choose a separator.   
					Tap the arrows to set the current year and month.   
					2. Select the current date.   
					To set the current time   
					3. Select a Time format   
					4. Select Time separator choose a separator.   
					5. Select Done   
					. 
					1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of   
					the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or   
					the lower half to decrease the number.   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					160   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology   
					in ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology’ on page 144.   
					Workdays tab   
					You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want   
					to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also   
					specify the first day of your week to customize the display of   
					both Week and Month views in Calendar.   
					Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:   
					Settings   
					Devices   
					• A device name for your P910i.   
					• Bluetooth on or off.   
					• If it should be visible to other Bluetooth equipped   
					devices.   
					User greeting   
					A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your   
					P910i is paired (bonded) with.   
					Your P910i can show a user greeting on the standby screen when   
					you turn it on. Use this dialog to turn this function on or off. You   
					can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters).   
					• To change the name of a device, and to allow for   
					connection without confirmation, select the name in   
					the list.   
					• To remove a device from the list, select the name and   
					select Remove   
					• To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to   
					the list, tap Add   
					. 
					. 
					The Connections tab   
					The connections tab contains settings related to how your P910i   
					communicates with other devices.   
					Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P910i,   
					and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily   
					recognisable. It is a good idea to change these names to   
					something more useful. The name you choose for your P910i   
					appears on any devices you pair it with.   
					Bluetooth   
					Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable   
					wireless connections between your P910i and other Bluetooth-   
					enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of   
					up to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices   
					will have an effect on the performance. Read more about   
					See ‘Pairing’ on page 145 for instructions on how to connect to   
					another device using Bluetooth wireless technology.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					161   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length   
					and type of flow control required for the connection. When   
					connecting your P910i via the desk stand to a USB port on   
					your PC, use the following (default) settings:   
					Security   
					On the Settings tab you can set the Bluetooth security related   
					settings of your P910i.   
					Bluetooth on   
					All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from   
					your P910i works. Visibility according to the Visible   
					to other devices setting.   
					Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, it   
					will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will   
					automatically switch on if you use Send as >   
					Bluetooth from the applications   
					Baud rate   
					115200   
					None   
					1 
					8 
					Parity   
					Stop bits   
					Character length   
					Flow control   
					CTS/RTS   
					Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the flip is   
					closed by selecting   
					Visible to   
					other devices   
					Selected: All Bluetooth wireless technology   
					functionality from your P910i works.   
					Cleared: All Bluetooth wireless technology   
					functionality from your P910i works but you cannot   
					receive beamed items, and other devices cannot   
					initiate pairing with your P910i.   
					Applications >   
					Connections >   
					Cable.   
					GSM Networks   
					This option lets you choose what network to use when you are   
					outside your operator’s area. Choose if you want to search for a   
					new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of   
					preferred networks.   
					Cable   
					Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection   
					parameters used when communicating through your P910i's   
					cable port.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Search mode – Select between automatic or manual search for   
					a network.   
					• 
					Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set   
					the mode to Modem when using the P910i as a modem and   
					when using the DUN (Dial-up Networking) Wizard.   
					Select network – Tap the button to get a list of available   
					networks.   
					New search – Tap the button to search for available networks.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					162   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• 
					Preferred list – Show the networks that your P910i will search   
					for when you are outside your home network.   
					P910i automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set   
					up an Internet account before you can:   
					Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available   
					networks.   
					• 
					• 
					Access Web pages and download multimedia messages.   
					Set up an email account to send and receive email messages.   
					To add a network to the preferred list   
					Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask   
					your service provider to send you a message that contains the   
					required information to create an account automatically on your   
					P910i.   
					1. Tap Add network   
					. 
					2. Select a network from the displayed list.   
					3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done   
					. 
					
					Dial-up   
					: 
					For Dial-Up (CSD, Circuit Switched Data)   
					connections, you are charged for the length of   
					time that you are connected to the Internet.   
					Infrared   
					Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your   
					P910i.   
					High-Speed Dial-Up   
					: 
					For High-Speed Dial-Up (HSCSD, High Speed   
					Circuit Switched Data) connections you are   
					charged for the length of time you are   
					Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required.   
					connected but you can increase the connection   
					speed so that information is transferred faster.   
					You can set it Off On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about   
					connecting to other devices using infrared in ‘Connection via   
					Infrared port’ on page 144.   
					, 
					The service must be included in your   
					subscription and billing rates from your   
					network operator may increase as you increase   
					the connection speed.   
					Internet accounts   
					GPRS   
					: 
					For a GPRS connection you are charged for the   
					amount of information you view, download, or   
					send.   
					You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP),   
					who supplies you with account details including: a username, a   
					password, and the phone number or Web site address that your   
					The dialog has two tabs: Accounts and Other.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					163   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Accounts tab   
					New   
					GPRS account   
					The Internet accounts dialog lists all the Internet accounts that   
					have been set up on your P910i.   
					For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings,   
					provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the   
					tabs as described below   
					You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an   
					existing account.   
					GPRS Advanced tabs   
					Server   
					Username and password required   
					If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect   
					to the Internet, select the Show connection dialog check box. This   
					may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for   
					Normally, you do not have to enter a username and   
					password when you connect to a GPRS account.   
					However, some service providers may require you to   
					enter these details.   
					Internet and   
					Messages.   
					If you select the Username and password required   
					check box, but do not enter a username and   
					password, you will be prompted to enter these when   
					the P910i connects.   
					Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is   
					the account that your P910i prompts you to use.   
					To create a new Internet account   
					Address   
					1. On the Accounts tab, select New   
					. 
					Enter the Internet address of your access point. The   
					address is supplied by your service provider.   
					2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in   
					your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a   
					connection is being established the text -GPRS is   
					automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.)   
					3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you   
					want to create, GPRS or Dial-up.   
					4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ   
					depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-up or High-   
					Speed Dial-Up:   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					164   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					GPRS Advanced tabs   
					GPRS Advanced tabs   
					Log in   
					The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS   
					addresses.   
					Authentication is used by some network operators to   
					identify the mobile phone connecting to their GPRS   
					network. There are different methods, or protocols,   
					for doing this.   
					The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet   
					Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your   
					P910i uses to connect to the Internet. Your P910i can   
					normally fetch these addresses automatically from   
					most ISPs.   
					If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot   
					connect to the Internet and you suspect these   
					addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their   
					primary and secondary DNS addresses.   
					An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid   
					input is between 000 and 255 in each box.   
					Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol).   
					The user's username and password are transmitted   
					over the network in an unencrypted form.   
					Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake   
					Authentication Protocol). The user's username and   
					password are never transmitted over the network.   
					None: No authentication is required by the network   
					operator.   
					QoS   
					Check with your network operator before changing   
					any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings.   
					Proxy   
					Other   
					A proxy server is a computer connected between   
					your P910i and the computer you communicate with.   
					This arrangement can be used for connections to   
					Remote Sync servers, or within a company network.   
					If this setting is needed, your company's Information   
					Services department or Remote Sync provider must   
					give you instructions.   
					The settings Precedence Delay, Peak rate, and Mean   
					, 
					rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means   
					that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service)   
					values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3 by   
					default.   
					New   
					Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account   
					If your ISP supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP)   
					extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions   
					check box. PPP extensions allow your P910i to   
					provide features such as encryption, which increases   
					the security of your Internet connection.   
					Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User   
					name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P910i   
					dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Dial-   
					Up account with your network operator you can increase the   
					speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab   
					under Advanced   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					165   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you   
					travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for   
					example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP.   
					Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs   
					Select the check box Post connect terminal if:   
					• The login script of the account that you are setting up   
					requires that you input certain information or you will   
					need to respond to prompts from the Internet accounts.   
					You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure   
					Access generated by a separate smart card or password   
					generator.   
					For some accounts you may also need to make advanced   
					settings.   
					Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described   
					below   
					Proxy   
					Speed   
					For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the   
					‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 164.   
					Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs   
					Log in   
					The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses.   
					For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the   
					‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 164.   
					You can only increase the speed of your connection if you   
					have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your network   
					operator.   
					Script   
					As an alternative to entering your username and password   
					to access the Internet you may need to use a login script   
					stored on your P910i. Although uncommon, scripts may   
					be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).   
					Select the Use log in script check box and enter the script   
					Secure   
					To enable secure access for this Internet account you   
					must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this   
					dialog:   
					1. Select the Enable secure access check box.   
					To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P910i, select   
					text in the Script editor   
					. 
					Control panel > Other >Secure tokens   
					. 
					If you select the check box Plain text authentication   
					(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection   
					will decrease during the connection process. Once you   
					are connected, the security of your connection will be   
					restored.   
					2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token   
					that you want to link to this account from the drop-down   
					lists.   
					Other   
					If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to   
					Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the   
					Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow   
					your P910i to provide features such as encryption, which   
					increases the security of your Internet connection.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					166   
					Control panel   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To edit an Internet account   
					not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops   
					(Icon: ) incoming calls will be accepted.   
					1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.   
					2. Select Edit   
					3. Change your settings as desired.   
					4. Select Done   
					. 
					Setting the Preferred mode lets you choose how you want to use   
					your P910i:   
					. 
					• 
					Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by   
					incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming   
					voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect   
					from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing   
					calls are possible, except during data transfer. This mode is   
					useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as   
					banking.   
					Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that   
					account will be deleted.   
					To delete an Internet account   
					1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.   
					2. Select Delete   
					3. Select Yes   
					. 
					• 
					• 
					If you select GSM only, your P910i will not be connected to   
					the GPRS network. If you choose to download email or   
					browse the Web, your P910i will connect to GPRS only as   
					long as is needed for the data connection.   
					. 
					Other tab   
					If you select Automatic, your P910i will let you answer   
					incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS   
					functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily   
					interrupted by a voice call.   
					You can use the Dial-up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up   
					your P910i to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if you   
					are not using it. The connection is broken after the period you   
					specify has lapsed.   
					Preferred mode (bearer preference)   
					Please note that your P910i can be used for either voice (or   
					GSM data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the   
					same time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an   
					Messaging accounts   
					The   
					Messages application can handle many different types   
					of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make   
					settings as described below.   
					example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:   
					) your P910i may   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					167   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The Messaging accounts dialog has four tabs, one for each type   
					of messaging account:   
					Email tab   
					The Email tab shows a list of the email accounts on your   
					P910i.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an   
					existing account.   
					Email   
					You can have any number of email accounts. To receive   
					and send email, you must first set up an Internet account   
					(if one is not already set up). See ‘Internet accounts’ on   
					page 163.   
					You can choose one of your email accounts as Preferred. This   
					will be the email account that your P910i uses when you use   
					Send as to send an entry as email directly from one of your P910i   
					applications   
					SMS   
					MMS   
					You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service)   
					account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS   
					(Extended Message Service) messages.   
					You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging   
					Service) account. To receive MMS messages you must   
					
					up). See‘Internet accounts’ on page 163.   
					To create a new email account   
					1. On the Email tab, select New.   
					2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:   
					Area   
					You can only have one Area info account. The number of   
					Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is   
					limited by the space on your SIM.   
					Email account basic tab settings   
					Account name   
					Your name   
					This is the name you give to your email account.   
					This name appears on your outgoing email   
					messages.   
					Tip A simple way of setting up an email or multimedia message   
					account is to ask your service provider to send you a message   
					that contains the required information to create an account   
					automatically on your P910i.   
					Email address   
					Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you   
					with your email address.   
					Connection type   
					Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common.   
					IMAP makes it possible to subscribe to server   
					based folders.   
					Read more about the different types of messages in ‘Messages’   
					on page 91.   
					Internet account   
					Select the Internet account to access your email   
					messages.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					168   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Email account Inbox tab settings   
					Email account Outbox tab settings   
					Username   
					Password   
					Incoming server   
					address   
					Outgoing server   
					address   
					Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you   
					with your username, your password, and its   
					incoming server address, which identifies the   
					computer where your incoming email messages   
					are stored.   
					Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you   
					with its Outgoing server address, which identifies   
					the computer through which your outgoing email   
					messages are sent.   
					Use SMTP   
					Some SMTP servers might also require   
					authentication   
					Open in full   
					screen   
					Select to open messages in full screen portrait   
					view.   
					authentication when sending email. In that case,   
					select the check box Use SMTP authentication and   
					enter your User name and Password   
					. 
					Download   
					If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose   
					to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject,   
					and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is   
					larger than the Emails Smaller than limit, only the   
					headers are downloaded). You can download the   
					complete message later. You can also set a limit to   
					the total number of messages held in your email   
					account at any one time.   
					Use Inbox login   
					details   
					If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login   
					information for authentication, select the check   
					box Use Inbox login details   
					. 
					Email account Advanced tab settings   
					Secure   
					connection   
					Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you   
					whether you can use either a Secure connection or   
					Secure password authentication   
					. 
					Schedule   
					Select Schedule download to schedule an   
					automatic download of your incoming email   
					messages. Messages that are waiting in your   
					Outbox will not be sent at the same time.   
					Outgoing mail   
					port   
					Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP   
					instructs you to.   
					Use MIME   
					encoding   
					MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-   
					textual information (for example graphics) and   
					accented characters to be sent in email messages.   
					If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding   
					, 
					clear the check box.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					169   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					SMS tab   
					Email account Advanced tab settings   
					Incoming mail   
					port   
					Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP   
					instructs you to.   
					Use these settings to set up text messaging and EMS   
					messaging:   
					Secure   
					password   
					authentication   
					A secure connection means that all information   
					(including your username, password, and all   
					messages) is encrypted to maximize security while   
					you are connected to the Internet. In contrast,   
					secure password authentication means that only   
					your password is encrypted.   
					Messaging accounts SMS tab settings   
					SMS Service   
					centre address   
					The SMS Service centre address is the phone   
					number where your text messages are stored. It is   
					normally imported from the SIM card but if that   
					fails, your network operator can provide you with   
					the service centre address.   
					To edit an email account   
					Character set   
					Your network operator may also specify the   
					Character set   
					. 
					1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.   
					Messages stored   
					for   
					You can set a time limit after which text messages   
					are deleted from the network by choosing a value   
					in the Messages stored for list.   
					2. Select Edit   
					3. Change your settings as desired.   
					4. Select Done   
					. 
					. 
					Connection type   
					Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM   
					connection as directed by your network operator.   
					To delete an email account   
					Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries,   
					you can avoid having to change the service centre address when   
					you travel abroad by entering the international dialling prefix   
					(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your   
					network operator.   
					1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.   
					2. Select Delete   
					3. Select Yes   
					. 
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					170   
					Control panel   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Advanced settings   
					Select Advanced to make settings about how your P910i will   
					send and receive multimedia messages.   
					MMS tab   
					Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:   
					Messaging accounts MMS tab settings   
					MMS Advanced settings tabs   
					Service centre   
					address   
					The MMS Service centre address is the URL to the   
					server on which your multimedia messages are   
					stored. Your MMS service provider or your network   
					operator can provide you with the service centre   
					address.   
					Send   
					The values you give these settings will be default for all   
					multimedia messages that you send. You can of course   
					choose other values for an individual message in Messages.   
					You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is,   
					how long they should be available to the receiver.   
					Maximum is the default.   
					WAP account   
					Automatic   
					Specify which of your configured WAP accounts   
					you wish to use.   
					• WAP accounts are created in Control panel >   
					Connections > WAP accounts   
					You can give your messages a Priority of Low   
					, 
					Normal   
					(default) or High   
					. 
					You can set Content alert for the multimedia messages you   
					create to help you check content.   
					Select between:   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Off - automatic download is off, you will receive   
					notifications of incoming messages and have to   
					download them manually.   
					Home only - messages are downloaded   
					automatically when you are connected to your   
					home network.   
					If you select Warning, a warning message is displayed   
					whenever you add a non-conformant item to a multimedia   
					message. You have the option to send anyway. If you select   
					Restricted, the message will not be sent in the situation   
					described above. Free means no restrictions.   
					On - messages are also downloaded automatically   
					when you are roaming outside your home network.   
					Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:   
					Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your   
					number.   
					Read report requests a read notification from receivers of   
					your messages.   
					Delivery report requests a delivery notification from   
					receivers of your messages.   
					Reply with history includes the original with your reply.   
					Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming   
					messages:   
					Download size   
					and   
					Smaller than   
					• 
					No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages   
					does not matter, all messages will be received.   
					Smaller than - messages smaller than the limit will   
					be received, bigger messages will be deflected.   
					• 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					171   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all   
					subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic   
					report.   
					MMS Advanced settings tabs   
					Receive   
					These settings apply to multimedia messages that you   
					receive.   
					Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to   
					play MMS messages in full screen.   
					Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the   
					sender when a message is:   
					To enable Cell Information   
					Select the Cell information check box   
					To turn Area Information on   
					• Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification   
					• Read by you: Allow read notification   
					1. Check the Area information check box. Received messages   
					will be automatically stored, and displayed in the list when   
					dismissed.   
					You can filter reception of incoming messages by message   
					type (Advertisements Information) or from senders not   
					, 
					listed in Contacts (Anonymous senders). Selecting a check   
					box will filter out messages of that category.   
					To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed   
					in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the   
					2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your   
					P910i. The check box for each channel shows if it is on   
					(selected, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not   
					active):   
					check box for Anonymous senders   
					. 
					To add a new channel   
					Area tab   
					1. Select New   
					. 
					On the Area tab you make settings related to Cell Broadcast   
					Services. These include both Area Information and Cell   
					Information services. The availability of Cell and Area   
					Information Services is operator-dependent.   
					2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel   
					dialog. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are   
					too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will   
					see a message: Maximum channels on SIM   
					. 
					Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information.   
					Your P910i can display it below the network name in the flip   
					closed standby view.   
					Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult   
					your network operator for information.   
					To turn a channel on or off   
					Select the channel in the list and select the check box. To turn it   
					off, clear the check box.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					172   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To delete a channel   
					Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service   
					Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must   
					choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a   
					new one.   
					Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you   
					will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will   
					also delete any stored Area Information messages for that   
					channel in your Area Info Inbox.   
					To create a new WAP account   
					1. Enter the name of the WAP account.   
					2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred   
					WAP accounts   
					indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup.   
					Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your   
					P910i.   
					3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the   
					Use Proxy check box.   
					WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for   
					accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways   
					make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings   
					should be included in your Internet accounts.   
					4. Enter the Address of the gateway or proxy.   
					5. Enter the Port of the gateway or proxy.   
					For a WAP gateway use:   
					– 
					– 
					9201 for a normal connection.   
					For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for   
					example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular   
					WAP account.   
					9203 for an encrypted secure connection.   
					6. If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which   
					is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialog.   
					The dialog has two tabs: Basic and Preferred.   
					Preferred tab   
					Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be   
					used when you use the Open page command in the   
					application and when a page is opened from another P910i   
					application. If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the   
					preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the   
					Internet.   
					Basic tab   
					The dialog shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P910i.   
					You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an   
					existing account.   
					Internet   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					173   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Security information   
					The Other tab   
					Security information is displayed when Certificate manager   
					The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the   
					cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For   
					device or connections. This is also where settings from system   
					example, security information will be displayed if:   
					components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers,   
					will be found.   
					• 
					• 
					The certificate on a page has expired.   
					The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified.   
					Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your   
					P910i has:   
					Certificate manager   
					Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit,   
					or any software you install, really are created by the person you   
					expect.   
					• 
					• 
					Expired.   
					Been revoked by the independent organization that issued it.   
					Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the   
					software that you download. Your P910i compares these   
					certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate   
					manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the   
					certificates do not match, your P910i informs you, and gives you   
					the following choices:   
					Adding and deleting certificates   
					Your P910i handles certificates automatically so, most of the   
					time, you can browse the Internet securely without using   
					Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate,   
					you will usually be informed by your network operator or   
					system administrator. You should delete a certificate from   
					Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:   
					• 
					• 
					Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed.   
					Continue at your own risk.   
					• 
					• 
					The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it.   
					The certificates on your P910i have been created and issued by   
					an independent organization that ensures their authenticity.   
					The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent   
					organization that created it.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					174   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it,   
					including any applications that you may have installed. You also   
					delete all information placed on it by other devices (these   
					folders are hidden except in File Manager).   
					Type of certificate   
					The type can be either User or Certificate Authority   
					. 
					• 
					User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate   
					is used when the server asks for client authentication. The   
					client application requests you to identify yourself by   
					choosing a user certificate.   
					IP Security manager   
					The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one   
					policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure   
					connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If   
					needed, your company information services department will   
					supply the necessary information.   
					• 
					Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This   
					type of certificate is handled by your P910i when the server   
					only requires server authentication. This means that your   
					identity remains anonymous.   
					There are two types of passwords needed:   
					Flip settings   
					• 
					IP security password: is to be set when activating the very   
					first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is   
					possible to change it later at any time by tapping the   
					Password button.   
					Flip keyboard - Specify the keyboard your P910i has on the inside   
					of the flip.   
					Enable virtual flip - Select the check box to use of the Virtual flip   
					when the flip of your P910i has been removed.   
					• 
					Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated   
					for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this.   
					Format disk   
					Language selection   
					This dialog primarily lets you rename and format any Memory   
					Stick that you install in your P910i. Your P910i comes with one   
					Memory Stick.   
					Use this list of all languages stored on your P910i to change   
					language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					175   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is   
					loaded on your P910i at delivery. When you select one of the   
					languages from the list the unused languages in the set are   
					deleted from the memory of your P910i.   
					log in to that network to use secure access and generate the   
					required one-time password when you make the connection.   
					Your P910i supports the following secure access systems:   
					• 
					• 
					SecureID from RSA   
					SafeWord from Secure Computing   
					Master reset   
					It is also possible to add other access systems through third-   
					
					Use Master reset to reset your P910i.   
					Note All user data, as well as pre-installed media files and   
					application data files (including, for example, backgrounds,   
					ring signals and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set   
					to the state they were, after you selected the language. The   
					selected local language will be restored.   
					If you have a separate device or application that requires one-   
					time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not   
					need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your   
					P910i can generate passwords that are not associated with an   
					Internet account.   
					If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the   
					backup, see ‘Restoring data’ on page 151.   
					You manage secure access in your P910i using Secure Tokens.   
					Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be   
					associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when   
					you use your P910i as a Hard Token). You can configure as   
					many tokens as needed.   
					You can restore media files and application data files from the   
					Content and Application CD, or from the Web.   
					If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user   
					installed applications check box.   
					Tip Dialog details when using secure access are vendor, system   
					and network-specific. You should contact the administrator of   
					the network you wish to access to get the correct information.   
					Secure tokens   
					If you need access to a network that requires secure access   
					(often known as ‘strong authentication’), for example a   
					corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					176   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate application to   
					view or play a file in the list.   
					Storage manager   
					The list shows the applications on your P910i and the space they   
					occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general files   
					stored internally on the P910i or on a Memory Stick.   
					To delete files or copy files between folders   
					1. Select Files.   
					2. Select the Type of file to move or delete.   
					3. Select the Location folder.   
					Deleting information from applications   
					To delete information from an application: select an application   
					in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or   
					unwanted entries or information.   
					4. Tap one or more check boxes to select the files to copy or   
					delete.   
					5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder.   
					Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:   
					To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					• 
					Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a   
					lot of space.   
					Uninstalling applications   
					If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you   
					want to use it later.   
					In   
					Messages, delete any old messages from your Inbox or   
					Sent folders.   
					In   
					Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by   
					To uninstall applications   
					selecting Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries.   
					1. Select Uninstall.   
					In   
					Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting   
					A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown.   
					Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries.   
					2. Select the application to uninstall.   
					Throughout your P910i, use folders as you create and receive   
					information to speed up housekeeping later.   
					3. Select Uninstall.   
					Deleting or copying general files   
					Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your P910i   
					and the Memory Stick. You can copy files to a specified folder,   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Control panel   
					177   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To change the PIN code   
					WIM PIN settings   
					1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list.   
					WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security   
					2. Select Change PIN   
					. 
					functions, especially to store and process information needed for   
					user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant   
					store for private keys, certificates and other items that may   
					require a PIN for access or modification.   
					If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it   
					can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN   
					. 
					The WIM management dialog consists of a PIN choice list and a   
					WIM items list.   
					You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items   
					list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that   
					are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated   
					certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but   
					do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM   
					item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected.   
					Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that   
					do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on   
					the WIM are linked to PIN-G.   
					You can change status of a PIN:   
					• 
					• 
					Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for   
					authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation   
					you must enter the PIN code.   
					Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to   
					authorize an operation to proceed.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					178   
					Control panel   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					Connection type   
					When your P910i connects to a service provider, it will use a   
					GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many   
					network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services.   
					Introduction   
					Before you can use   
					Internet and   
					Messages to access the   
					Internet and send or receive messages, you will need to make   
					some user-specific settings in the   
					Control Panel.   
					The connection type defines which network your account uses   
					to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS   
					network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network.   
					Service provider   
					You will need a service provider to connect your P910i to the   
					network.The service provider could be:   
					GPRS   
					If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet   
					account allows you to:   
					• 
					An Internet Service Provider (ISP) which connects you to the   
					Internet.   
					• 
					• 
					An access point provided by your network operator.   
					• 
					Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being   
					charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are   
					charged for the amount of information you view, download   
					or send when your are connected to the Internet. Check your   
					operator for details of your subscription.   
					A private service provider such as your company or your   
					bank.   
					You will need to enter specific service provider details into your   
					P910i to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of   
					multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate   
					Internet and corporate accounts.   
					• 
					Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is   
					broken.   
					Dial-up   
					Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed   
					services, check with them.   
					For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are   
					charged for the length of time you are connected. If your   
					network operator supports them, you can increase your   
					connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					179   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Accepting new Internet or Messages   
					settings   
					Automatically set up service   
					provider and messaging   
					New phone set-up messages will appear in the Auto setup   
					The easiest way to set up your P910i is automatically, through   
					your service provider.   
					account inbox of   
					Messages. (Phone set-up messages for   
					email accounts will, however, be found in your SMS inbox.)   
					For   
					of:   
					Messages settings your P910i supports automatic setup   
					When an phone set-up message appears, select it.   
					A dialog with a brief text and operator message appears on the   
					screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in   
					• 
					• 
					email accounts   
					the inbox   
					. 
					MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings.   
					If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing   
					account you can choose to create a new account with the same   
					name or replace the existing account.   
					Check your service provider's Web site for information or   
					contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote   
					phone set-up of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, email   
					and MMS message settings.   
					Note Never accept remote phone set-up messages if you are not   
					expecting them or are unsure where they have come from.   
					If remote phone set-up is possible, they will send you the phone   
					set-up messages required by SMS message.   
					Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of   
					these services may also be available through the phone setup-   
					message generator at www.SonyEricsson.com/support   
					Manually set up service   
					provider   
					As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically,   
					To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct   
					you can enter the settings manually from   
					Control panel >   
					1. Select   
					Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >   
					Connections > Internet accounts.   
					SMS.   
					First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain   
					this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if   
					2. Check the information, for example the address of the service   
					centre.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					180   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					
					services department.   
					The dialog has four tabs, one for each type of messaging   
					service:   
					Email   
					The provider of your email service, or for a corporate   
					account, your information services manager can provide   
					you with the necessary details.   
					All settings are described in ‘Email tab’ on page 168.   
					To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a   
					new email account’ on page 168.   
					All settings are described in ‘Internet accounts’ on page 163.   
					To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new   
					Internet account’ on page 164.   
					SMS   
					MMS   
					Short Message Service   
					The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM   
					card.   
					Manually set up messaging   
					
					enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use   
					All settings are described in ‘SMS tab’ on page 170.   
					yourself from   
					Control panel > Connections > Messaging   
					Multimedia Messaging Service   
					Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you   
					with the necessary information.   
					Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an   
					Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet   
					accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >   
					Connections > WAP accounts   
					accounts   
					. 
					First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain   
					this information from the following sources:   
					• 
					If your network operator offers an email service you can get   
					the necessary details from them.   
					All settings are described in ‘MMS tab’ on page 171.   
					• 
					• 
					Your Internet service provider.   
					Area   
					Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information   
					Your network operator will be able to inform you if these   
					services are available.   
					Your information services manager in the case of connecting   
					to the corporate network to access your work email account.   
					All settings are described in ‘Area tab’ on page 172.   
					• 
					Your network operator in the case of SMS message and Cell   
					Broadcast Services.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					181   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain   
					Setting up WAP accounts   
					this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are   
					A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a   
					connecting to a corporate network, your information services   
					service provider and gateway that should be used when making   
					manager.   
					a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account   
					when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service).   
					All settings are described in ‘WAP accounts’ on page 173.   
					To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new   
					WAP account’ on page 173.   
					The WAP gateway sits between your P910i and the WAP site   
					coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more   
					than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS   
					messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another   
					to access your bank's WAP service.   
					Using your P910i as a modem   
					Your P910i contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you   
					can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate   
					intranet.Your P910i appears to the laptop like a normal modem.   
					The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P910i is   
					automatically, through your service provider. Check your   
					service provider's Web site for information or contact their   
					support desk and ask about automatic setup. You can also find   
					more information, and settings for many operators on:   
					http://www.SonyEricsson.com/support.   
					You link the laptop to your P910i using Bluetooth wireless   
					technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection   
					over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P910i   
					supports:   
					Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service   
					Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must   
					choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a   
					new one.   
					• 
					• 
					• 
					GPRS   
					HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data)   
					CSD (Circuit Switched Data).   
					Manually set up a WAP account   
					Instead of setting up a WAP account automatically, you can   
					A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up   
					Networking Wizard, is provided on your Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD.   
					The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking)   
					entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections.   
					enter the settings manually from   
					Control panel > Connections >   
					WAP accounts   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					182   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P910i is   
					ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network.   
					Since Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight   
					alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position   
					and let your P910i remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be   
					placed up to 10 metres away.   
					wireless technology. See ‘Connecting to other devices’ on   
					page 143.   
					Make sure that you have any information concerning, for   
					example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the   
					server that you want to connect to may require.   
					To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched   
					Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard   
					If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to   
					one metre. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight,   
					at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees.   
					1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson   
					folder of the Start menu on your PC.   
					The Dial-Up Networking Wizard   
					2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection.   
					3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.   
					The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by   
					setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the   
					entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P910i. You can   
					also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P910i.   
					To edit a previously created DUN entry   
					1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson   
					folder of the Start menu on your PC.   
					For HSCSD DUN entries, the wizard updates the modem   
					settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer   
					(ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN   
					connection.   
					2. Modify a Dial-Up connection.   
					3. Select the desired connection from the list.   
					4. Follow the instructions in the wizard.   
					You can view or change the DUN entries created with the   
					wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface.   
					To define P910i as a modem   
					To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection you will   
					need to install your P910i as a modem manually.   
					The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the Sony   
					Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and your P910i   
					must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					183   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD or HSCSD   
					1. On the PC, open the Control Panel.   
					2. Choose to install a new modem.   
					A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides   
					information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection   
					status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three   
					states for the icon, unavailable   
					attached   
					, available   
					and   
					3. Choose your P910i as the modem.   
					4. Select the port where the P910i is connected.   
					. 
					The HSCSD/CSD   
					a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the   
					GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon   
					There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active   
					active transferring data (alternates between and   
					and suspended . Any data transfer either received or sent   
					and GPRS   
					icons are displayed during   
					5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been   
					created.   
					. 
					, 
					) 
					Connecting   
					To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard   
					activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds.   
					1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P910i to Modem cable   
					connection mode, see ‘Cable’ on page 162.   
					Connection information   
					2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:   
					– Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard.   
					– Select the entry from within the system DUN folder.   
					When you select the data connection icon, during an active data   
					connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and   
					Disconnect   
					. 
					– Run an application that has built-in support for using   
					DUN entries (for example a browser or email client).   
					• 
					• 
					Select Information to view information on the connection.   
					Select Disconnect to end the connection.   
					GPRS status information   
					When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status   
					information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear.   
					GPRS - connection information   
					Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data   
					connection calls.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					184   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					To delete or reset the log of several accounts   
					GPRS data log   
					1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted   
					or reset.   
					A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account   
					establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for   
					transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the   
					current GPRS connection, this is updated.   
					2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete   
					. 
					Session data   
					The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts.   
					Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status   
					icon is displayed to the left of the account.   
					When the connection is deactivated, for example when the   
					current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and   
					received in the last session is displayed.   
					To view information on an account   
					The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss   
					the information when the flip is closed, press   
					. 
					1. Select an account in the list.   
					2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated   
					dynamically.   
					Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These   
					buttons are disabled during an active or suspended   
					connection.   
					To delete the log for an account   
					1. Select an account in the list.   
					2. Select GPRS data log > Delete   
					. 
					To reset the log of an account   
					1. Select an account in the list.   
					2. Select GPRS data log > Reset   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Getting started with Internet and Messages   
					185   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					REFERENCE   
					Troubleshooting   
					This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving   
					possible problems with your P910i. If this does not help, please   
					Start-up problems   
					try the Knowledge base on the global support site,   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support. There you also find other   
					information that can be helpful.   
					P910i will not   
					start   
					• Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery.   
					• Make sure the contacts on the battery and   
					charger are clean and avoid charging the battery   
					in extreme temperatures.   
					Your P910i also contains help files with additional information.   
					Access help with the menu option Edit > Help or, in many dialog   
					• Vehicle Handsfree: check that the P910i is   
					properly inserted into the holder and check the   
					fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery   
					cable).   
					boxes, with the help icon   
					. 
					To improve performance, you can update the software of your   
					P910i. See “Sony Ericsson Update Service” on page 142.   
					Lock problems   
					If you need to hand in your P910i for repair, please note that you   
					may lose information and content that you have saved in your   
					P910i. You are advised to make a copy of such information   
					(make a backup) before handing your P910i in for repair.   
					Insert card   
					• Make sure a SIM card is activated and inserted   
					into your P910i. See ‘SIM card’ on page 12.   
					Blocked SIM   
					card   
					If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a   
					row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can   
					unblock it by using your PUK. See ‘SIM card lock’   
					on page 43.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					186   
					Troubleshooting   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Device lock   
					Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt   
					Communication problems   
					Enter lock code   
					. 
					Telephone does • The received signal can be too weak, possibly   
					Your P910i is locked to prevent unauthorized use.   
					To unlock the P910i:   
					• Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default,   
					not work   
					because you are being shielded from the signal.   
					Check your display signal strength indicator.   
					Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a   
					sufficiently strong signal.   
					then press   
					or   
					. 
					• Make sure the P910i is not set in Flight mode.   
					Key symbol   
					The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key   
					action.   
					• Your P910i might be busy sending or receiving   
					data or email.   
					Press   
					keys.   
					followed by   
					to unlock the   
					• Check the settings for diverting or restricting   
					calls. See ‘Divert calls’ on page 59, ‘Accept   
					calls’ on page 60 and ‘Restrict calls’ on page 60.   
					Indicator light   
					Flashes red   
					This indicates that the battery is running low and   
					soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare.   
					• With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make   
					sure that the following are inserted or connected:   
					Your P910i and its holder, the fuse in the fuse   
					holder, and/or the external antenna.   
					• If Emergency calls only is displayed on the   
					screen, you are not allowed to use the network   
					within range. You can, however, usually make an   
					emergency call using the emergency number.   
					• If No network is displayed on the screen, you are   
					in an area that is not covered by a network or the   
					received signal is too weak.   
					Does not flash   
					If the indicator light at the top of your P910i does   
					not flash and no network is displayed there is no   
					network within range. See ‘Telephone does not   
					work’ on page 187.   
					Cannot hear   
					incoming call   
					• Increase the ring signal volume.   
					• Your P910i is set in silent mode.   
					• Your P910i is set in Flight mode.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Troubleshooting   
					187   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					The person I   
					am talking to   
					has a problem   
					hearing what I   
					am saying   
					• Make sure you do not cover the microphone   
					when you talk. You find the microphone at the   
					bottom of the phone, next to the connector.   
					Cannot use   
					e-mail   
					• Check with your service provider that your   
					subscription includes email.   
					• The settings might not be correct. Enter new   
					settings. Use the phone setup-message generator   
					for email on www.SonyEricsson.com/support   
					to send you an auto setup message, or contact   
					your service provider. See also “Email tab” on   
					page 168.   
					• You could be almost out of network range. The   
					sound improves with a better network   
					connection.   
					Cannot use   
					WAP   
					• Your subscription does not include WAP. Check   
					with your service provider.   
					Fax calls   
					• Your P910i does not support fax transmission.   
					Even if your operator subscription supports fax   
					transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However,   
					they can be diverted to another number such as   
					the office fax number, see ‘Divert calls’ on   
					page 59 for more information.   
					• The settings are not correct. Enter new settings.   
					Contact you service provider or visit   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the   
					WAP phone setup-message generator.   
					Cannot send   
					nor receive   
					SMS or MMS   
					• Your subscription does not include SMS or   
					MMS. Check with your service provider.   
					• Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send   
					a fax to your P910i as they can experience a   
					number of retries before the fax transmission is   
					stopped.   
					• Check with you service provider that you have   
					
					number.   
					• Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact   
					you service provider or visit   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the   
					MMS phone setup-message generator.   
					• Make sure that Flight mode is deactivated.   
					• Phone memory might be full. Delete some   
					pictures or music, for example.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					188   
					Troubleshooting   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Cannot   
					establish   
					• Make sure that the devices are correctly paired.   
					See ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless   
					technology’ on page 144.   
					Problems to connect to a PC or another device   
					Not possible to • Make sure that the Sync Station and cable is   
					connection with   
					a Bluetooth   
					wireless   
					technology   
					handset or   
					handsfree   
					establish   
					correctly connected to the PC.   
					• Make sure that the handset or handsfree is   
					charged.   
					connection   
					using cable   
					• Make sure that the correct COM port on the PC   
					is enabled. Right-click the P910i link symbol in   
					the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the   
					USB COM port.   
					• Make sure that the devices are in range with each   
					other.   
					• Make sure the device lock is not active.   
					Cannot find PC • You can find PC software on   
					• Uninstall Sony Ericsson PC Suite. Connect the   
					Sync Station with the P910i to the PC. Reinstall   
					Sony Ericsson PC Suite, following the   
					installation procedure carefully.   
					software for   
					downloading   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support and also on   
					local sites.   
					Cannot use my • First ask your service provider to enable your   
					• Check for Sony Ericsson PC Suite updates on   
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support. If you find   
					
					install this instead of the old one.   
					P910i as a   
					modem   
					data connection.   
					• Then connect your P910i to your PC with cable,   
					Bluetooth technology, or infrared. See “Using   
					your P910i as a modem” on page 182,   
					“Connecting to other devices” on page 143, and   
					Knowledge base on www.SonyEricsson.com/   
					support   
					Cannottransfer Place the P910i in the Sync Station. In the PC,   
					pictures   
					open My P910i and browse through the P910i file   
					system to find the picture.   
					Cannottransfer • Make sure that Bluetooth wireless technology is   
					items with   
					Bluetooth   
					wireless   
					activated.   
					• Make sure that the devices are in range with each   
					other. Maximum range is 10 metres.   
					technology   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Troubleshooting   
					189   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Cannot   
					synchronize   
					with my PC   
					• Connect to your PC with cable, Bluetooth   
					technology, or infrared. See “Connecting to   
					other devices” on page 143.   
					Storage   
					Manager   
					You can also use the storage manager to free up   
					memory.   
					• Select   
					Applications >   
					Control   
					• Then install Sony Ericsson PC Suite, and make   
					necessary settings. See “Synchronization and   
					backup” on page 148 and the help files in Sony   
					
					www.SonyEricsson.com/support   
					panel > Device > Storage manager.   
					• A list of all applications and their memory   
					requirements is shown.   
					• See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on   
					page 177 and ‘Deleting information from   
					applications’ on page 177.   
					Memory full   
					When your P910i has no more space available to   
					Information in Use the applications to remove unused or old items   
					save or store information, the icon   
					is shown in   
					applications   
					from the P910i internal memory:   
					• WAP history or bookmarks.   
					• Messages.   
					the status bar. You must then free up memory to   
					ensure the proper functioning of the P910i.   
					• Make sure regular backups are made with   
					Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost   
					or corrupted information.   
					• Contacts.   
					• Call logs.   
					• Calendar tasks or appointments.   
					• Jotter notes.   
					Storage Wizard   
					• Tap the icon   
					in the status bar to start the   
					Miscellaneous   
					Storage Wizard, or start it in the application   
					launcher. Then use the storage wizard to move   
					items from the P910i internal memory to a   
					Memory Stick, or remove items from the P910i   
					memory.   
					Cannot save on • You might have a Memory Stick with a lock   
					Memory Stick   
					switch. Move the switch in the other direction.   
					• The Memory Stick might be full. Delete some   
					files on it.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					190   
					Troubleshooting   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Tap on display   
					does not work   
					Applications   
					stop responding   
					• Close the flip and open it again.   
					Occasionally you may find that you tap one   
					item (for example a button or menu option)   
					but another is activated. Calibrating the   
					screen ensures that the correct item is   
					activated. Tap Control panel > Device tab >   
					Display > Screen tab > Calibrate screen and   
					follow the instructions.   
					• Turn off the P910i and turn it on again.   
					• Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, and   
					insert it again.   
					• Phone memory might be full. Delete some   
					pictures or music, for example.   
					• If the problem continues, do a master reset. See   
					‘Master reset’ on page 176. All data will be lost.   
					Cannot change • The first time you start the P910i you select a   
					language   
					language. All other languages are then deleted, in   
					order to free memory. You can find all languages   
					on the Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD. From the   
					CD, you can install the language you want. You   
					can find more languages on   
					System failure   
					In the case of a system failure, your P910i will   
					flash an animated warning. To recover, please   
					restart the P910i like this:   
					• Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10   
					seconds to turn the P910i off.   
					
					• Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to   
					turn on your P910i.   
					• When you have installed a new language, you   
					have to turn your P910i off and then on again for   
					the change to take effect.   
					Incorrect   
					character   
					appears when   
					keyboard key is   
					pressed   
					• The wrong keyboard type can be specified in the   
					control panel. Make sure the correct settings are   
					defined in Control panel > Other tab > Flip   
					settings > Flip keyboard   
					. 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Troubleshooting   
					191   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					
					Please read this information before using your mobile phone.   
					Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR   
					Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned   
					on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or   
					radio frequency fields).   
					Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before   
					placing this product to your ear.   
					Recommendations   
					Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety   
					guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Com-   
					mission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electri-   
					cal and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough evaluation of   
					scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave expo-   
					sure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to   
					assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any   
					variations in measurements.   
					• Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.   
					• Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.   
					• Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures.   
					• Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products.   
					• Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.   
					• Do not paint your product.   
					Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio   
					frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR   
					value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions,   
					but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below   
					this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power   
					required to reach the network.   
					• Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission.   
					• Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted ‘turn off   
					two-way radio’.   
					• Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere   
					exists.   
					Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that   
					there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among   
					mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio   
					frequency exposure guidelines.   
					A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included   
					with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be   
					found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on:   
					www.SonyEricsson.com.   
					• Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your   
					car’s airbag.   
					• Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorized   
					personnel should perform any service.   
					Antenna   
					Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your   
					mobile phone. Use of unauthorized or modified antennas could damage your   
					mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR   
					levels above the recommended limits (see below).   
					Driving   
					Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while   
					driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use   
					only Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your product. Please   
					note that because of possible interference with other equipment, some vehicle   
					manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree   
					kit with an external antenna supports the installation.   
					Efficient use   
					Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the   
					phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate   
					at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Guidelines for safe and efficient use   
					192   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making   
					or answering a call if driving conditions so require.   
					Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection   
					under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile   
					phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies).   
					Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain net-   
					work services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local ser-   
					vice provider.   
					Personal Medical Devices   
					Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other   
					implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker,   
					e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear oppo-   
					site the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the   
					mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have   
					any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your   
					mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information.   
					Battery Use and Care   
					We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone   
					for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5°C   
					(+41°F) and +45°C (+113°F).   
					For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device.   
					A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced   
					capacity the first few times it is used.   
					Children   
					The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when   
					using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power   
					is required and talk and standby times are prolonged.   
					A rechargeable battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times. How-   
					ever, it will eventually wear out – this is not a defect. When the talk-time or   
					standby time is noticeably shorter, it is time to replace your battery. Sony Ericsson   
					recommends that you use only batteries and chargers approved by Sony Ericsson.   
					DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR   
					ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR   
					COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSO-   
					RIES. YOUR MOBILE PHONE AND ITS ACCESSORIES MAY CONTAIN   
					SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING   
					HAZARD.   
					• Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.   
					Disposing of the Product   
					• Use only Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers   
					intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may   
					not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using   
					other batteries and chargers could be dangerous.   
					Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local   
					regulations for disposal of electronic products.   
					Power Supply   
					• Do not expose the battery to liquid.   
					Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the   
					product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage   
					or stress. To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power   
					source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used out-   
					doors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the   
					outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.   
					• Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal   
					object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery.   
					• Do not disassemble or modify the battery.   
					• Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, and never   
					above +60°C (+140°F). For maximum battery capacity, use the   
					battery in room temperature.   
					• Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery.   
					Emergency Calls   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Guidelines for safe and efficient use   
					193   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					• Keep out of the reach of children.   
					Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a   
					returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions   
					below.   
					Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product   
					is repaired or replaced.   
					• Use the battery for the intended purpose only.   
					• Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery   
					electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed.   
					Disposing of the battery   
					Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your   
					local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre for information.   
					The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a bat-   
					tery disposal facility if available.   
					Conditions   
					1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original   
					purchaser by a dealer authorized by Sony Ericsson for this Product, specifying   
					the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be   
					repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty   
					service if this information has been removed or changed after the original   
					purchase of the Product from the dealer.   
					Limited warranty   
					2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced   
					Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty   
					period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer.   
					Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent   
					reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of   
					Sony Ericsson.   
					Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Eric-   
					sson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original acces-   
					sory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product").   
					Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from   
					whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre   
					(national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com to obtain further infor-   
					mation.   
					3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and   
					tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal   
					and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for   
					use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure   
					of the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or   
					adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid.   
					Our warranty   
					Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this   
					
					its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year.   
					4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a   
					carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible   
					for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system.   
					What we will do   
					5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations,   
					modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony   
					Ericsson authorized person.   
					If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and   
					service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson author-   
					ized distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased   
					the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance   
					with the terms and conditions stipulated herein.   
					6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of   
					accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Sony Ericsson branded   
					original accessories intended for use with the Product.   
					7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Guidelines for safe and efficient use   
					194   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR   
					Environmental information   
					ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL   
					IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE   
					IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A   
					PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS   
					LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS   
					•Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the   
					printed wiring board of the phone.   
					• Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W.   
					LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL   
					DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT   
					LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL   
					EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.   
					Some countries/regions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or   
					consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the   
					preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.   
					For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for   
					P910i at www.SonyEricsson.com   
					The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under appli-   
					cable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from   
					their sales/purchase contract.   
					Declaration of Conformity   
					We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of   
					Nya Vattentornet   
					* European Union (EU)   
					If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product   
					serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU   
					country where an identical Product is sold by an authorized Sony Ericsson distrib-   
					utor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the   
					local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre. Please observe that certain services   
					may not be possible anywhere other than in the country of original purchase, for   
					example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is   
					different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible   
					to repair SIM-locked Products.   
					S-221 88 Lund, Sweden   
					declare under our sole responsibility that our product   
					Sony Ericsson type FAB-1021012-BV and FAB-1021012-CN   
					and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in con-   
					formity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7,   
					EN 300328, EN 301489-17 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio   
					Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with   
					requirements covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/   
					23/EEC.   
					** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is   
					clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase.   
					Kista, June 2004   
					Place & date of issue   
					0682   
					FCC Statement   
					This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-   
					ject to the following two conditions:   
					We fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC).   
					(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and   
					(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that   
					may cause undesired operation.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Guidelines for safe and efficient use   
					195   
					 
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Terms and definitions   
					AU   
					bps   
					Format for audio data files. AU files have the suffix .au   
					Bits per second – rate of data flow.   
					Bearer   
					cHTML   
					Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD,   
					the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server –   
					PSTN or ISDN.   
					A version of HTML optimised for small devices.   
					CLI   
					Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling   
					you in your mobile phone display. Your P910i will also display   
					the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts.   
					You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to   
					take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed.   
					To use this service, it must be supported by your network.   
					Bluetooth   
					Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection   
					technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry   
					specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and   
					personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with   
					each other and with home and business phones and computers   
					using a short-range wireless connection.   
					COM Port   
					Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment.   
					BMP   
					CS   
					Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by   
					Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit colour depth. No   
					compression, so files can be large.   
					Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed   
					bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example   
					a voice phone call.   
					Bookmark   
					CSD   
					A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to   
					go directly to a Web or WAP page.   
					Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS   
					data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					196   
					Terms and definitions   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					CSS   
					GIF   
					Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers.   
					Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which   
					also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting   
					the colour palette to 16 or 256 colours. It is one of the two most   
					common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide   
					Web. The other is JPEG.   
					DTMF   
					Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a   
					combination of two audible tones.   
					DUN   
					GPRS   
					Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in   
					Windows.   
					General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM   
					networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup   
					time for ISP connections, and offers the possibility of charging   
					by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time.   
					GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates   
					typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of   
					171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network.   
					e-GSM   
					Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European   
					Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when   
					additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows   
					operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core   
					900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased   
					network capability.   
					GSM   
					Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's   
					most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating   
					in over 160 countries around the world.   
					EMS   
					Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling   
					pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to   
					text messages.   
					GSM 900   
					The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and   
					GSM 1900. GSM 900 refers to GSM working on a frequency of   
					900 MHz.   
					FCC   
					Federal Communications Commission. US government agency   
					which regulates radio communications.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Terms and definitions   
					197   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					GSM 1800   
					your local server. The email is received and held for you by your   
					IMAP server. You (or your client email receiver) can view just   
					the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether   
					to download the mail.   
					Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network   
					working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and   
					Asia-Pacific.   
					GSM 1900   
					IrDA   
					Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the   
					1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance.   
					The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing   
					standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between   
					devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P910i can   
					exchange data with other devices without a cable connection.   
					IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission.   
					HSCSD   
					High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched   
					wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to   
					64 kbps.   
					ISDN   
					Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol   
					offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to   
					carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for   
					CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup.   
					HTML   
					Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or   
					codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide   
					Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to   
					display a Web page's words and images.   
					ISP   
					Internet Service Provider. An organization that provides access   
					to the Internet.   
					HTTP   
					HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol   
					used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary   
					function is to establish a connection with a Web server and   
					transmit HTML pages to the client browser.   
					JFIF   
					JPEG File Interchange Format.   
					JPEG   
					IMAP4   
					Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG   
					format for still image compression.   
					Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4)   
					is a standard client/server protocol for accessing email from   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					198   
					Terms and definitions   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					MBM   
					MP3   
					Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format.   
					MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for   
					compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-   
					twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the   
					original level of sound quality when it is played.   
					MeT   
					Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by   
					Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and   
					consistent framework for mobile transactions.   
					MPEG-4   
					The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for   
					digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under   
					the auspices of the International Organization for   
					Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression   
					methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams,   
					MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated   
					independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and   
					providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range   
					of audio and video modes and transmission speeds.   
					MIDI   
					MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol   
					designed for recording and playing back music on digital   
					synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal   
					computer sound cards.   
					MIME   
					Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining   
					how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is   
					used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of   
					data they contain.   
					OS   
					Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft   
					Windows.   
					MMS   
					Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and   
					EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video   
					to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo   
					quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies   
					format.   
					OTA   
					Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of   
					application related configuration information in a wireless   
					communications system.   
					PC   
					Personal Computer.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Terms and definitions   
					199   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					PCS   
					POP3   
					Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM   
					1900 networks.   
					Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for   
					receiving email. The email is received and held for you by your   
					POP server. Periodically, the P910i Messages application can   
					check your mail-box on the server and download any mail.   
					PDA   
					Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having   
					functions such as address book, calendar, and so on.   
					Protocol   
					In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules   
					that end points in a telecommunication connection use when   
					they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a   
					telecommunication connection.   
					PDF   
					Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for   
					storing and distributing documents.   
					Phone book   
					QQVGA   
					A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored   
					and accessed by name or position.   
					Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels.   
					QVGA   
					PIM   
					Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen   
					240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high.   
					Personal Information Management. Generic term for   
					applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on.   
					RS232   
					PIN   
					A standard for serial transmission between computers and   
					peripheral devices   
					A PIN is a personal identification number.   
					PNG   
					SC   
					Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file   
					with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of   
					information).   
					Service Centre (for SMS).   
					Service Provider   
					A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile   
					phone users.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					200   
					Terms and definitions   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					SGML   
					SyncML   
					A generic markup language for representing documents.   
					SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization,   
					developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd.   
					SIM   
					A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a ‘smart card’,   
					inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account   
					information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display   
					custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist   
					operators in providing mobile commerce applications.   
					TCP/IP   
					Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the   
					basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can   
					also be used as a communications protocol in a private network   
					(either an intranet or an extranet).   
					SMIL   
					TLS   
					Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS   
					to describe how media items are to be played.   
					Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example.   
					URL   
					SMS   
					Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on   
					the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com   
					Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160   
					characters (70 characters if you use non Latin characters) to be   
					sent and received via the network operator's message centre to a   
					mobile phone.   
					USB   
					Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a   
					computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks,   
					keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new   
					device can be added to your computer without having to add an   
					adapter card or even having to turn the computer off.   
					SMTP   
					Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send email   
					from an email client via an SMTP server.   
					SWIM   
					USSD   
					A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM.   
					Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM   
					data service. For example entering *79*1234# might return the   
					stock price for stock 1234.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Terms and definitions   
					201   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					vCal; vCalendar   
					WAP   
					vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format   
					for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in   
					PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by   
					IETF.   
					Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of   
					communication protocols to standardise the way that wireless   
					devices, such as cellular phones and radio transceivers, can be   
					used for Internet access, including email, the World Wide Web,   
					and newsgroups.   
					vCard   
					vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically   
					found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such   
					as Internet mail, voice mail, Web browsers, phone applications,   
					call centres, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax,   
					office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF.   
					WAV   
					A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that   
					has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from   
					system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is   
					identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav).   
					VGA   
					WBXML   
					Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM,   
					having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels.   
					Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language.   
					WIM   
					VPN   
					The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic   
					identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client   
					certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS   
					handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation.   
					The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM   
					card.   
					Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured   
					within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or   
					international network to the customer, but physically shares a   
					backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security   
					of a private network via access control and encryption, while   
					taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in   
					management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is   
					tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to   
					the constant threat of hacker attacks.   
					WML   
					Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for   
					authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText   
					Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					202   
					Terms and definitions   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small   
					handheld devices.   
					WTLS   
					Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS   
					provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport   
					layer level between two applications.   
					W3C   
					The main standards body for the WWW.   
					xHTML   
					Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of   
					HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be   
					viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the   
					same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in   
					existing HTML 4 conforming user agents.   
					XML   
					Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C   
					defining an ‘extremely simple’ dialect of SGML suitable for use   
					on the WWW.   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Terms and definitions   
					203   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Technical data   
					General   
					Screen   
					Product   
					Size   
					P910i standard version, BIG5 character set   
					115 x 57 x 26 mm   
					Screen type   
					Screen size   
					TFT   
					Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm   
					Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm   
					Weight   
					155 grams with battery and flip.   
					Pixel size   
					0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch)   
					System and   
					power class   
					E-GSM 900 Class 4   
					GSM 1800 Class 1   
					GSM 1900 Class 1   
					Colour resolution 18-bit (262 144 colours)   
					Screen surface   
					Illumination   
					Touch-sensitive   
					Antenna   
					Built in   
					Variable intensity back-light   
					Speech Coding   
					HR, FR, EFR supported where available, for   
					high speech quality.   
					Third Party Application Support   
					SIM Card   
					Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type   
					Operating System   
					Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ user interface and   
					applications environment   
					SDKs   
					C++, PersonalJava™ , J2ME CLDC/MIDP 2.0,   
					AppForge™ Microsoft Visual Basic 6 and .NET   
					Processor   
					ARM 9   
					Load formats   
					C++, Java or VB applications in Symbian SIS   
					format.   
					MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from Browser or   
					connected PC.   
					Internal User storage   
					For settings, user data (for example images,   
					contacts, messages) and third-party   
					applications: up to 64 MB (depending on   
					application in use)   
					Security   
					Support for signed applications.   
					Additional storage   
					Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 MB supported.   
					Memory Stick PRO Duo, up to 1 GB   
					supported. 32 MB Memory Stick Duo   
					supplied, plus adapter.   
					Bluetooth wireless technology   
					Bluetooth compatibility   
					statement   
					This product is manufactured to comply   
					with the Bluetooth specification 1.1.   
					Operating temperature –15° to +55° C   
					Battery life, standard   
					battery   
					Standby time: 16 - 250 hours (Depending on   
					usage method.)   
					Coverage area   
					Up to 10 metres (33 feet)   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					204   
					Technical data   
					 
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Infrared transceiver   
					Phone   
					Data transmission rate   
					Max speed between phone and IrDA   
					device (that is a PC or another phone)   
					SIR: up to 115,200 bps   
					Personal ring Sound clips as personal ring tones and default ring   
					tones   
					tone.   
					supported   
					formats   
					MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik)   
					and WAV.   
					GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps)   
					Integrated CommuniCorder   
					CS-1   
					CS-2   
					CS-3   
					CS-4   
					9.05 kbps 13.4 kbps 15.6 kbps 21.4 kbps   
					Image size   
					640 x 480 pixels (VGA)   
					320 x 240 pixels (QVGA)   
					160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA)   
					176 x 144 pixels (QCIF) (video)   
					4 + 1 Rx 36.2   
					Tx 9.05   
					53.6   
					13.4   
					62.4   
					15.6   
					85.6   
					21.4   
					Colour depth   
					24 bit (16 million colours)   
					Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by   
					the GSM Network.   
					Storage format   
					Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression)   
					levels, user-selectable.   
					Video: 3GPP/MPEG4 video with AMR sound.   
					HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps)   
					9.6 kbps per time slot   
					2 + 1 Rx 19.2   
					Tx 9.6   
					14.4 kbps per time slot   
					Pictures (Image viewer)   
					28.8   
					14.4   
					Formats   
					BMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG, MBM, PNG,   
					WBMP   
					Sharing via   
					Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS   
					message, e-mail, PC file transfer, Memory Stick   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Technical data   
					205   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Video player   
					Security   
					WTLS Class 1, 2, 3   
					WTLS Cipher RC5 with key length 128   
					TLS/SSL   
					File Format MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP (3GPP PSS)   
					Streaming   
					transport   
					RTSP according to 3GPP   
					TLS Cipher RC4 with key length 128   
					SignText   
					WIM   
					WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM)   
					15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default.   
					Cache   
					Music player   
					Content download OMA Download OTA ver 1.0   
					File Format   
					MP3, MP4, M4A,WAV, AAC, AU, AMR and   
					G-MIDI level 1 with 24 voices polyphony, RMF,   
					iMelody   
					SMS   
					Bearer   
					GSM and GPRS   
					Concatenated   
					Up to 255 messages   
					Integrated browser   
					Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a   
					MMS   
					small screen device)   
					WML 1.3   
					WBXML   
					Image formats   
					BMP, GIF (including animated), JPG, WBMP,   
					PNG   
					xHTML Basic   
					xHTML Mobile Profile   
					cHTML   
					Audio formats   
					Video formats   
					3GPP, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, MP3, RMF,   
					WAV   
					3GP (3GPP PSS), MP4 (receive only), Packet   
					video, SDP   
					WAP version   
					Scripting   
					2.0   
					Compiled WML scripts   
					WCSS   
					Style sheets   
					Images   
					EMS   
					BMP, WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG,   
					PNG   
					Supported items   
					Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					206   
					Technical data   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					Email   
					Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4   
					Outgoing mail server support SMTP   
					Content coding   
					Security   
					MIME compliant   
					SMTP authentication, SSL encrypted   
					IMAP4 and SMTP   
					Attachments   
					Receiving and sending   
					Document viewer and editor   
					Microsoft® Word   
					Microsoft® Excel   
					Adobe® Acrobat® (PDF)   
					Note The installed viewer for Microsoft Word documents   
					cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF)   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Technical data   
					207   
				Index   
					A 
					- inserting 12   
					- removing 12   
					Calls   
					Chess 89   
					Accepted callers 60   
					Accessories 25   
					Add to contacts 59   
					Alarm tones 154   
					Alarms 127   
					- answering 47, 49   
					- conference 51   
					- diverting 59   
					- emergency 47   
					
					
					Chinese characters 34   
					Chinese key mapping 35   
					Chinese punctuation 41   
					Chinese punctuations 35   
					Communicorder   
					- recording video clips 64   
					Conference calls 51   
					Connecting   
					Bluetooth wireless technolo-   
					gy 144, 161   
					- bluetooth share 147   
					- headphone 146   
					- pairing 145   
					ALS   
					- settings 63   
					- support 56   
					
					- incoming 49   
					Bookmarks 85   
					Browser view 82   
					Browsing the internet 81   
					
					- making 45, 48   
					- options 48, 50   
					- preferences 58   
					- rejecting 47, 50   
					- restricting 60   
					- retrying automatically   
					49   
					Antenna 192   
					- via Bluetooth wireless   
					technology 144   
					AoC - Call meter settings 62   
					Application shortcuts 152   
					Applications   
					- via infrared port 144   
					- via SyncStation 143   
					Connection type 179   
					Connectivity software 143   
					Contacts 105   
					C 
					Cable 162   
					- flip closed 15   
					- installing 140   
					- overview 26   
					Calculator 124   
					Calendar 113   
					- creating entries 113   
					- managing entries 114   
					- preferences 115   
					- sending and receiving   
					entries 115   
					Calibrate 156   
					Call costs 62   
					Call list 52   
					- removing 142, 177   
					Area information 172   
					Attachments 99   
					- speed dialling 49   
					- two or more 50   
					- voice control 58   
					- adding images 153   
					- creating and managing   
					contacts 108   
					Camera   
					- to add a contact 107   
					- to delete a contact 107   
					Content and Application 139   
					Control panel 155   
					Corporate phone services 56   
					- set up 61   
					B 
					- settings 67   
					Backgrounds 152, 156   
					Backing up data 150   
					Battery   
					Care instructions 192   
					Cell information 172   
					Certificate 174   
					- charging 13   
					- information 193   
					Call waiting 60   
					Calling cards 61   
					Certificate manager 174   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					208   
					Index   
					 
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					D 
					E-mail 91, 98, 168   
					Emergency calls 47   
					EMS 93   
					Formatting disks 174   
					International settings 157   
					Internet 81   
					Data backup 150   
					Data restore 151   
					Data storage 32   
					Date settings 125   
					Demo application 26   
					Device lock 43, 187   
					Dial-Up Networking Wizard   
					183   
					G 
					- accounts 163   
					- bookmarks 85   
					Games 89   
					Entering text   
					General functions 28   
					Getting help 32   
					
					
					- Chinese characters 34   
					- Chinese punctuation 35   
					- chinese punctuation 41   
					
					
					
					
					- latin characters 38   
					- numeric characters 39,   
					41   
					- browser view 82   
					- browsing 81   
					- signing documents 85   
					- user authentication re-   
					quest 85   
					H 
					Dictionary 135   
					- database 137   
					Introduction to P910i 9   
					IP security manager 174   
					Handsfree 59   
					Handwriting recognition 37   
					- extended characters 41   
					- history record and   
					bookmarks 136   
					- wildcards 136   
					Disk formatting 174   
					Display 155   
					Disposing of the battery 194   
					Diverting calls 59   
					Drawing pictures 121   
					Driving 192   
					J 
					Jog Dial 19   
					Jotter 120   
					I 
					Icons 21   
					Extended characters   
					- handwriting 41   
					- creating and editing   
					notes 120   
					- drawing pictures 121   
					- managing notes 121   
					- sending and receiving   
					notes 121   
					Image editor 71   
					Image status 67   
					Importing phone book en-   
					tries 14   
					Incoming call picture 58   
					Incoming calls 49   
					Increasing ring 158   
					Indicator light 187   
					Indicators 21   
					Infrared 144, 163   
					Inserting symbols 35   
					Installing applications 140   
					International calls 46   
					F 
					File manager 132   
					Find 30   
					First time start-up 14   
					Flight mode 53   
					Flip   
					DTMF 54   
					- turning on 48   
					K 
					Key functions 124   
					Key lock 44   
					Keyboard 35   
					- flip keyboard 41   
					Keypad functions 20   
					E 
					- virtual 17   
					Editing   
					Flip closed 15   
					Flip open 16   
					Folders 29   
					- spreadsheets 129   
					- Word documents 129   
					Efficient use 192   
					Folders in Messages 92   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Index   
					209   
				L 
					Messaging   
					P 
					Restricting calls 60   
					Retry to call 49   
					Ring signals 153   
					Ring volume 158   
					Languages 175   
					Latin characters 38   
					Light intensity 152   
					Local synchronization 148   
					Locations 126   
					Lock problems 186   
					Locks 42   
					- accounts 93, 167   
					P910i Locks 42   
					P910i overview 11   
					P910i package 10   
					PC connectivity software   
					143   
					PC Suite for P910i 138   
					Pdf documents 128   
					
					
					
					Mobile music 77   
					Modem 182   
					S 
					Multimedia messages 91, 94   
					SAR 192   
					Music player 77   
					Screen areas 18   
					Screen saver 153   
					Secure tokens 176   
					Security information 174   
					Self timer - picture 66   
					Self timer - video 65   
					Send as 31   
					Sending notes 121   
					Service provider 179   
					Services 25   
					N 
					- device 43   
					- key lock 44   
					- SIM card 43   
					
					Networks 162   
					Notes 120   
					Phone book   
					
					Pictures 69   
					M 
					- creating and editing 120   
					- managing 121   
					- sending and receiving   
					121   
					Making a call 106   
					Media buffer 76   
					Medical Devices 193   
					Memory Stick 22   
					- adapter 23   
					- drawing 121   
					- sending and receiving   
					70   
					Numbers   
					- formats 126   
					Numeric characters 39, 41   
					- taking 66   
					Settings 32   
					- viewing 69   
					PIN 43   
					PIN2 43   
					- formatting 174   
					Messages   
					Setup Wizard 14   
					Silent mode 53   
					SIM card 12   
					SIM card lock 43   
					SMS 91, 93, 170   
					Solitaire 89   
					Sony Ericsson Update Serv-   
					ice 142   
					Sound files   
					O 
					Off 14   
					On 14   
					Online services 134   
					On-screen keyboard 35   
					Options menu 16   
					Owner card 111   
					- accounts 93, 167   
					- attachments 99   
					- e-mail 98   
					- MMS 94   
					- multimedia messages   
					94   
					PUK 43   
					R 
					Radio Frequency 192   
					Recording sounds 122   
					Remote synchronization 149   
					Removing applications 142   
					Restoring data 151   
					- SMS 93   
					- text messages 93   
					- loop 78   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					210   
					Index   
				This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.   
					- managing 78   
					- playing 77   
					T 
					Updating the software 142   
					User greeting 160   
					WIM management 178   
					Word documents 128   
					-editing 129   
					Tasks 117   
					Sound notification 154   
					Sound recorder 122   
					Sound recordings 122   
					- sending and receiving   
					123   
					- using as ring signals   
					122   
					Sounds and alerts 157   
					Speakerphone 52   
					Speed dial   
					- making a call 49   
					- set-up 53   
					Spreadsheets   
					- editing 129   
					- viewing 128   
					Standby view 15   
					Start-up 14   
					Technical data 204   
					Text entry types 32   
					Text input 157   
					Text messages 93   
					Themes 152   
					V 
					Vibrating alert 50   
					Video 64   
					Video clips   
					Z 
					Zoom the screen 32   
					Zooming 30   
					
					- managing 74   
					- playing 73   
					- saving 75   
					- sending and receiving   
					75   
					Time 125   
					- alarms 127   
					
					- number formats 126   
					- settings 125   
					- workdays 126   
					Time & date settings 125   
					To input Chinese characters   
					39   
					Tone based services 54   
					Touchscreen lock 44   
					Transfer items with Send As   
					31   
					Troubleshooting 186   
					TTY settings 62   
					TTY support 55   
					Turning on and off 14   
					Video status 65   
					Viewing   
					- pdf documents 128   
					- spreadsheets 128   
					- Word documents 128   
					Virtual flip 17   
					Voice control 58   
					- making a call 46   
					Voice mail 60   
					Volume   
					Storage Manager 190   
					Storage manager 177   
					Storage Wizard 190   
					Storing data 32   
					Streaming 75   
					- changing 48   
					Symbols 35   
					Synchronization   
					- local 148   
					W 
					U 
					WAP accounts 173   
					Warranty 194   
					WIM 178   
					Uninstalling applications   
					142, 177   
					- remote 149   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					Index   
					211   
				 | 
Sharp Camcorder VL Z5E User Manual
Shure Stereo Receiver UHF User Manual
Snapper Lawn Mower 1690274 User Manual
Soehnle Postal Equipment cwb7726 User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner SG WAC 25HCE User Manual
Sony Battery Charger BCG 34HUE User Manual
Sony Camcorder XCD SX710 User Manual
SPX Cooling Technologies Refrigerator 05 116E User Manual
Sunbeam Iron 4040 026 User Manual
Sylvania DVD Recorder DVR90DE User Manual